JP7775241B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a pattern display means that can change and display patterns based on random number information obtained when a gaming ball enters the initial winning means, and is configured so that if a player wins a lottery based on that random number information and the stopped pattern after the pattern display means changes takes on a specific pattern, a profitable state will be generated for the player. Furthermore, the random number information used in the lottery is reserved and stored until it is used to change the pattern by the pattern display means, but there is an upper limit on the number of reserved balls (for example, four), and if a gaming ball enters the initial winning means when the number of reserved balls has reached that limit, the prize balls will be paid out but the player will not be able to participate in the lottery.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-094236

In this type of gaming machine, players usually stop firing when the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit to avoid so-called "waste shots." However, since it is difficult for players to constantly monitor the number of reserved balls, there is a possibility that players may not realize that the number of reserved balls has reached the upper limit and may fire a ball that results in a "waste shot."
The present invention has been made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can effectively prevent players from unintentionally "wasting" balls.

The present invention comprises a first symbol display means capable of variably displaying a first symbol based on first random number information acquired when a gaming ball enters a non-operational first start winning means, a first reservation storage means for reserving and storing the first random number information up to an upper limit of the reserved number until the first random number information is used for a symbol variation by the first symbol display means, an operation-type second start winning means which, when a predetermined opening condition is established, changes from a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the gaming ball to enter to an open state in which it is easier for the gaming ball to enter, and a second symbol display means capable of variably displaying a second symbol based on second random number information acquired when a gaming ball enters the second start winning means. a winning state generating means for generating a winning state when the stopped symbols after the variation of the first symbol display means become a first specific pattern based on the lottery result using the first random number information, or when the stopped symbols after the variation of the second symbol display means become a second specific pattern based on the lottery result using the second random number information; a special game state generating means for generating a special game state with a predetermined probability after the end of the winning state; and a movable performance means, wherein during the special game state, the second start winning means is in the open state for a longer period of time than during other normal game states, and a ball is shot to the upper side of the game area by a launching means. In a gaming machine configured such that an inserted gaming ball flows down either a first flow-down area on one side of the gaming area or a second flow-down area on the other side, gaming balls flowing down the first flow-down area are more likely to enter the first start winning means than gaming balls flowing down the second flow-down area, and gaming balls flowing down the second flow-down area are more likely to enter the second start winning means than gaming balls flowing down the first flow-down area, a holding device capable of notifying that the first reserved number, which is the number of the first random number information reserved and stored in the first reserve storage means, has reached a predetermined number or more. The device is equipped with a special notification means, the predetermined number is set to be less than the upper limit of the reserved number, and no notification is made by the reserved special notification means during the profit state and the special game state, and a pattern change effect which can be executed in response to the change display of the first pattern and which suggests the occurrence of the profit state includes a specific pattern change effect accompanied by operation of the movable effect means, and when the specific pattern change effect is not executed, a notification by vibration can be made by the reserved special notification means , and when the specific pattern change effect is executed, the notification by vibration by the reserved special notification means is not made.

This invention makes it possible to effectively prevent players from unintentionally "wasting shots."

1 is an overall front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a front view of the rear support member and fixed decorative means that constitute the game board of the pachinko machine. 1 is a cross-sectional side view of the main part (upper side) of the game board of the pachinko machine. 1 is a cross-sectional side view of a main part (lower part) of the game board of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko machine. This is a diagram showing the types of pending display modes in the same pachinko machine, the corresponding winning sounds, and the probability of winning. A diagram showing the types of special pending notifications and the corresponding notification modes in the same pachinko machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the priority of sound output when a winning entry is made at the start of the pachinko machine. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the variation of the mini symbols in the pachinko machine. FIG. This is a diagram showing the types of preview effects and the settings of the jackpot reliability in the same pachinko machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the overall configuration of the step-up preview effect in the pachinko machine. This figure shows the types of the third and fifth second half effects of the step-up preview effect in the same pachinko machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an outline of a specific example of a step-up preview effect in the pachinko machine. This is a diagram (part 1) showing details of the image changes during the period from the start of high-brightness effect WO11 to the end of high-brightness effect WO12 and the transition to the decorative pattern changing screen, among specific examples of step-up preview effects in the same pachinko machine. This is a figure (part 2) showing details of the image changes during the period from the start of high-brightness effect WO11 to the end of high-brightness effect WO12 and the transition to the decorative pattern changing screen, among specific examples of step-up preview effects in the same pachinko machine. This is a figure (part 3) showing details of the image changes during the period from the start of high-brightness effect WO11 to the end of high-brightness effect WO12 and the transition to the decorative pattern changing screen, among specific examples of step-up preview effects in the same pachinko machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the types of presentation modes of reach notice presentations in the pachinko machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an outline of a specific example of a reach notice effect in the pachinko machine. This is a diagram (part 1) showing details of the image changes during the period from the start of the high-brightness effect WO21 to the transition to the decorative pattern changing screen, among specific examples of reach preview effects in the same pachinko machine. This is a diagram (part 2) showing details of the image changes during the period from the start of the high-brightness effect WO21 to the transition to the decorative pattern changing screen, among specific examples of reach preview effects in the same pachinko machine. This is a diagram (part 3) showing details of the image changes during the period from the start of the high-brightness effect WO21 to the transition to the decorative pattern changing screen, among specific examples of reach preview effects in the same pachinko machine. This is a diagram showing an overview of a specific example of button preview performance 1 in the same pachinko machine. This figure shows details of the image changes in the button introduction effect BA0, one of the specific examples of button preview effect 1 in the same pachinko machine. This figure shows details of the image changes in the high brightness effect WO31, one of the specific examples of button preview effect 1 in the same pachinko machine. This figure shows details of the image change from high brightness effect WO32 to high brightness effect WO33, a specific example of button preview effect 1 in the same pachinko machine. This is a diagram showing the types and contents of dialogue preview performance 1 in the same pachinko machine, the dialogue content and display color, and the type of character. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an outline of a specific example of dialogue preview performance 1 in the pachinko machine. This is a diagram (part 1) showing details of the image changes during the period from the start of high-brightness effect WO41 to the end of high-brightness effect WO42, a specific example of dialogue preview effect 1 in the same pachinko machine. This is a diagram (part 2) showing details of the image changes during the period from the start of high-brightness effect WO41 to the end of high-brightness effect WO42, a specific example of dialogue preview effect 1 in the same pachinko machine. This is a diagram (part 3) showing details of the image changes during the period from the start of high-brightness effect WO41 to the end of high-brightness effect WO42, a specific example of dialogue preview effect 1 in the same pachinko machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an overview of a specific example of a pseudo consecutive announcement effect in the same pachinko machine. This figure shows details of the image changes during the period from the first pseudo-consecutive first half performance PF1A through the high brightness performance WO51 to the start of the first pseudo-consecutive second half performance PF1B, among specific examples of pseudo-consecutive preview performances in this pachinko machine. This figure shows details of the image changes during the period from the second pseudo-consecutive first half performance PF2A through the high brightness performance WO52 to the start of the second pseudo-consecutive second half performance PF2B, among specific examples of pseudo-consecutive preview performances in the same pachinko machine. This is a diagram showing an overview of a specific example of button preview performance 2 in the same pachinko machine. This is a diagram (part 1) showing details of the image changes in the button teasing effect BB1, one of the specific examples of button preview effect 2 in the same pachinko machine. This is a diagram (part 2) showing details of the image changes in the button teasing effect BB1, one of the specific examples of button preview effect 2 in the same pachinko machine. This is a diagram (part 3) showing details of the image changes in the button teasing effect BB1, one of the specific examples of button preview effect 2 in the same pachinko machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the types of presentation modes for the interrupt notice presentation in the pachinko machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an outline of a specific example of an interrupt notice effect in the pachinko machine. This is a diagram (part 1) showing details of the image changes during the period from the start of high-brightness effect WO71 to the end of high-brightness effect WO73, among specific examples of interrupt notice effects in the same pachinko machine. This is a diagram (part 2) showing details of the image changes during the period from the start of high-brightness effect WO71 to the end of high-brightness effect WO73, among specific examples of interrupt notice effects in the same pachinko machine. This is a diagram (part 3) showing details of the image changes during the period from the start of high-brightness effect WO71 to the end of high-brightness effect WO73, among specific examples of interrupt notice effects in the same pachinko machine. This is a diagram showing an overview of a specific example of dialogue preview performance 2 in the same pachinko machine. This is a diagram (part 1) showing details of the image changes during the period from the character appearance performance SB1 to the line output performance SB3, among specific examples of the line preview performance 2 in the same pachinko machine. This is a diagram (part 2) showing details of the image changes during the period from the character appearance performance SB1 to the line output performance SB3, among specific examples of the line preview performance 2 in the same pachinko machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an outline of a specific example of a reliability suggestion effect in the pachinko machine. This is a diagram (part 1) showing details of the image changes during the period from the first string start effect PR1 to the second line output effect PR4, among specific examples of reliability suggestion effects in the same pachinko machine. This is a diagram (part 2) showing details of the image changes during the period from the first string start effect PR1 to the second line output effect PR4, among specific examples of reliability suggestion effects in the same pachinko machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an outline of a specific example of a reach title display effect in the pachinko machine. This figure shows details of the image changes during the period from the title display start effect TS1 to the title notification effect TS, among specific examples of reach title display effects in the same pachinko machine. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing an overview of specific examples of operation presentations in the pachinko machine. This figure shows details of the image changes during the period from the operation display start effect BC1 to the operation promotion effect BC2, among specific examples of operation effects in the same pachinko machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an outline of a specific example of a reach development effect in the pachinko machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram (part 1) showing details of image changes during the period of high brightness effect WOB1, among specific examples of reach development effects in the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram (part 2) showing details of image changes during the period of high brightness effect WOB1, among specific examples of reach development effects in the same pachinko machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram (part 3) showing details of image changes during the period of high brightness effect WOB1, among specific examples of reach development effects in the pachinko machine. 10A and 10B are explanatory diagrams showing other examples of high-brightness images in the pachinko machine.

Embodiments of the invention will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Figures 1 to 59 illustrate an embodiment in which the present invention is adopted in a pachinko machine. In Figures 1 and 2, the gaming machine main body 1 comprises an outer frame 2 and a front frame 3 arranged in front of the outer frame 2. The front frame 3 is pivotally attached to the outer frame 2 via a first hinge 4 in the up-down direction arranged at one end in the left-right direction, for example the left end, so that it can be opened, closed, and detached freely. The front frame 3 can be locked in the closed position relative to the outer frame 2 by a locking means 5 provided on the opposite side in the left-right direction from the first hinge 4, for example the right end.

As shown in Figure 2, the front frame 3 comprises a main frame 6 and a glass door 7 arranged in front of the main frame 6. The glass door 7 is pivotally attached to the main frame 6 via a second hinge 8 arranged in the vertical direction at one end in the left-right direction, for example, the left end, so that it can be opened, closed, and detached freely, and can be locked in the closed position relative to the main frame 6 by a locking means 5. The first hinge 4 and second hinge 8 are arranged, for example, to be coaxial.

As shown in Figure 2, the outer frame 2 is rectangular and made up of a pair of left and right vertical frame members 2a, 2b and a pair of upper and lower horizontal frame members 2c, 2d. A resin front cover member 9 is attached to the lower front of the outer frame 2, connecting the lower front of the left and right vertical frame members 2a, 2b along the front edge of the lower horizontal frame member 2d. The front cover member 9 protrudes forward beyond the left and right vertical frame members 2a, 2b, with the main frame 6 located above it. Additionally, an upper outer frame hinge fitting 11 that constitutes the first hinge 4 is located on the upper left of the outer frame 2, and a lower outer frame hinge fitting 12 is located above the front cover member 9 on the lower left.

The main body frame 6 is made of resin and includes, for example, a rectangular frame portion 13 that is above the front cover member 9 and can generally abut the front edge of the outer frame 2, a game board mounting portion 14 provided on the upper side of the frame portion 13, and a lower mounting portion 15 provided on the lower side of the frame portion 13. A game board 16 is detachably mounted, for example, from the front side, to the game board mounting portion 14, and a launching means 17 capable of launching game balls toward the play area 23, a lower speaker 18, and other components are disposed on the front side of the lower mounting portion 15. Furthermore, the main body frame 6 is provided with a main body frame upper hinge fitting 19 that constitutes the first hinge 4 and a main body frame upper hinge fitting 20 that constitutes the second hinge 8, for example, at the upper left, and a main body frame lower hinge fitting 21 that constitutes the first and second hinges 4 and 8, for example, at the lower left.

As shown in Figures 1 and 2, the glass door 7 has a rectangular resin door base 22 that corresponds to the front side of the main frame 6. This door base 22 has a window hole 24a for the glass window 24 that corresponds to the play area 23 formed on the front side of the game board 16. Multiple (four in this case) upper speakers 25, a ventilation device 26, and other presentation devices are arranged around the window hole 24a, and an upper decorative cover 27 is attached that substantially covers the upper speakers 25 and other devices from the front. At least a portion of the upper decorative cover 27 forms a light-emitting lens that is translucent, and one or more LED boards 28 with numerous LEDs 28a are arranged behind it.

Also located on the lower front side of the door base 22 are an upper tray 30 that stores game balls paid out from the payout means 29 located on the rear side of the main frame 6 and supplies them to the launching means 17, a lower tray 31 that stores surplus balls when the upper tray 30 is full, and a launch handle 32 that is operated to activate the launching means 17. Furthermore, a lower decorative cover 33 is attached that substantially covers the upper tray 30, lower tray 31, etc. from the front. The lower decorative cover 33 is formed in a forward-facing bulge, and on its upper side are provided operation means such as an effect button 34 that can be pressed by the player and a cross operation means 35. Furthermore, a vibration means 34a is located near the effect button 34, and by activating this vibration means 34a, the effect button 34 vibrates and generates a vibration sound due to the vibration.

A glass unit 36 is removably attached to the rear side of the door base 22 so as to substantially block the window opening 24a from the rear. Also removably fixed with screws or the like are: a vertical hinge end reinforcing metal plate 37 positioned along the edge of the first and second hinges 4 and 8; a vertical opening/closing end reinforcing metal plate 38 positioned along the edge of the opening/closing end; and a horizontal lower reinforcing metal plate 39 positioned below the window opening 24a. Additionally, a glass door upper hinge fitting 40 and a glass door lower hinge fitting 41, which form the second hinge 8, are positioned on the upper left and lower left of the door base 22, respectively.

Furthermore, a ball feeding unit 42, a lower tray guide unit 43, etc. are attached to the back side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 39. The ball feeding unit 42 is used to supply game balls in the upper tray 30 one by one to the launching means 17, and is located corresponding to the front side of the launching means 17. The lower tray guide unit 43 is used to guide surplus balls when the upper tray 30 is full, and foul balls that have been launched by the launching means 17 but have returned without reaching the playing area 23, to the lower tray 31, and is located, for example, adjacent to the ball feeding unit 42 on the side of its first and second hinges 4, 8.

The gaming board 16 is a so-called transparent gaming board equipped with a base plate 45 formed from a transparent resin such as polycarbonate. As shown in Figures 3 and 4, the base plate 45 is equipped with a guide rail 51, a central display frame unit 52, a normal winning unit 53, a start gate unit 54, a first starting winning unit 55, a second starting winning means 56, a big winning unit 57, an LCD display means (image display means) 58, a movable presentation means 59, and a fixed decoration means 60. The second starting winning means 56 is positioned on the central display frame unit 52, but it may also be attached to the base plate 45 as a separate unit from the central display frame unit 52. The gaming board 16 may also use an opaque base plate made of plywood or the like.

The LCD display means 58, movable presentation means 59, fixed decoration means 60, etc. are arranged on the rear side of the base plate 45 via a rear support member 61, etc. As shown in Figures 4 to 6, the rear support member 61 integrally comprises a rear wall portion 62 arranged rearward of and generally parallel to the base plate 45, and a peripheral wall portion 63 extending generally forward from the outer periphery of the rear wall portion 62, and is fixed by screws or the like with the front edge of the peripheral wall portion 63 abutting against the back side of the base plate 45.

A roughly rectangular opening 62a is formed in the rear wall 62 of the rear support member 61, and the LCD display means 58 is removably fixed to the back side of the rear wall 62 with the display screen 58a corresponding to the opening 62a. The movable presentation means 59 and fixed decoration means 60 are positioned within the rear support member 61, i.e., behind the base plate 45 and in front of the LCD display means 58, and are removably fixed to the rear wall 62, etc.

The guide rail 51 is used to guide game balls launched from the launching means 17. It is arranged in a generally annular shape on the front side of the base plate 45 so as to surround the periphery of the play area 23, and is composed of multiple, for example, three, first to third rail members 51a to 51c, as shown in Figure 3, etc. The first rail member 51a is formed in a generally arc shape, extending from the lower left side of the base plate 45 to approximately the center of the left edge, approximately the center of the upper edge, and to the upper right. The second rail member 51b is arranged in a generally arc shape, extending from the upper left to the lower left of the base plate 45, parallel to the inside of the first rail member 51a. The portion sandwiched between the first rail member 51a and the second rail member 51b forms a launch guide passage 66, which guides game balls launched by the launching means 17 to the play area 23. The third rail member 51c is formed in a generally L-shape in front view along the right and bottom edges of the base plate 45, connecting the upper right end of the first rail member 51a and the lower left end of the second rail member 51b.

The central display frame unit 52 constitutes the display frame for the LCD display means 58 and includes a display window 74 in its approximate center for viewing the display screen 58a of the LCD display means 58 from the front. It is detachably attached from the front to a mounting hole (not shown) formed in the base plate 45 that penetrates the front-to-rear direction. The central display frame unit 52 is made of transparent or translucent resin, and as shown in Figures 3, 5, 6, etc., includes a front mounting plate 71 that is positioned outside the mounting hole along the front surface of the base plate 45 and through which game balls can pass; a decorative frame 72 that is arranged in a roughly gate-like shape in front view by left and right side decorative frames 72a and an upper decorative frame 72b above it and that protrudes forward from the inner periphery of the front mounting plate 71; and a stage 73 that is positioned between the left and right lower ends of the decorative frame 72. Game balls launched by the launching means 17 and entering the upper part of the game area 23 via the launch guide passage 66 are split to the left and right at the top of the upper decorative frame 72b, and flow down either the left flow down area (first flow down area) 76 on the left side of the central display frame unit 52 or the right flow down area (second flow down area) 77 on the right side.

The central display frame unit 52 has a warp ball entrance 78, through which game balls can enter, located in either the left flow-down area 76 or the right flow-down area 77, for example, on the left flow-down area 76 side. Game balls that enter the warp ball entrance 78 from the left flow-down area 76 are guided to a stage guide passage 79 and flow into the stage 73 from its left end. The stage 73 is formed in a gentle, roughly V-shape when viewed from the front, with the center lower than the left and right ends. Game balls guided by the stage guide passage 79 are allowed to roll freely left and right, and then fall forward from either the central drop section 80 or another part.

In addition, various display means are provided on the central display frame unit 52, such as a normal symbol display means 91, a normal reserved number display means 92, a first special symbol display means 93, and a second special symbol display means 94. Of course, these display means 91 to 94 are not limited to being on the central display frame unit 52, but can be placed at any position on the front side of the gaming board 16 so that they are visible from the front.

The normal winning unit 53 is arranged along the guide rail 51 in the lower left portion of the game area 23, i.e., the lower side of the left flow-down area 76, and is equipped with multiple, for example, two, normal winning openings 101, 102, one or more, for example, one outlet 103, and a game ball detection means 104 that detects game balls that enter the normal winning openings 101, 102. The normal winning openings 101, 102 open upward or diagonally upward and are arranged adjacent to each other on the left and right near the downstream end of the normal winning unit 53. After being detected by the game ball detection means 104, game balls that enter the normal winning openings 101, 102 are guided to the rear of the game board 16 and ejected outside the machine. For each game ball that enters the normal winning openings 101, 102, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. The outlet 103 opens substantially upward and is located adjacent to the upstream side, i.e., the left side, of the normal winning ports 101 and 102. Gaming balls that enter the outlet 103 are guided to the rear of the gaming board 16 and ejected outside the machine.

The start gate unit 54 is located on the right side of the game area 23, i.e., on the right flow-down area 77, and is detachably attached from the front to a longitudinally penetrating mounting hole formed in the base plate 45. It is equipped with a normal symbol start gate 106 through which game balls can pass in the vertical direction, and game ball detection means 107 that detects game balls that have passed through the normal symbol start gate 106. The normal symbol start gate 106 is used to start the variation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display means 91, and game balls flowing down the right flow-down area 77 either pass through the normal symbol start gate 106 or flow downstream without passing through the normal symbol start gate 106.

Here, the normal symbol display means 91 is used to variably display normal symbols, and is equipped with multiple light-emitting elements (e.g., LEDs) corresponding to multiple normal symbols (e.g., two types: "○" and "X"). When a gaming ball flowing down the right flow area 77 passes through the normal symbol start gate 106 and is detected by the gaming ball detection means 107, the multiple light-emitting elements flash to emit light in a predetermined sequence. If the winning determination random number value included in the normal random number information acquired when the gaming ball detection means 107 detects the gaming ball matches a predetermined winning determination value, the light-emitting element corresponding to a winning state (predetermined state), for example, on the "○" side, lights up; otherwise, the light-emitting element corresponding to a losing state, for example, on the "X" side, lights up and stops. If the stopped symbol after the normal symbol display means 91 changes becomes a winning state, a normal winning state occurs. The normal winning state will be described later.

In addition, if a gaming ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 106 during a normal hold period, which includes when the normal symbol display means 91 is changing symbols and when the normal profit state is in effect, the normal random number information acquired thereby is held and stored up to a predetermined upper limit of the number of held symbols, for example, four, and each time the normal hold period ends, one symbol is consumed at a time, causing the normal symbol to change. The number of stored normal random number information (normal hold number) is notified to the player by the normal hold number display means 92, etc.

The first start winning unit 55 is located at the lower side of the game area 23, approximately in the center in the left-right direction, i.e., between the central display frame unit 52 and its lower guide rail 51. It is detachably attached from the front to a longitudinally penetrating mounting hole formed in the base plate 45, and is equipped with a first start winning opening (first start winning means) 111 and a game ball detection means 112 that detects a game ball that enters this first start winning opening 111. The first start winning opening 111 is a non-operational winning means that initiates the variation of the first special pattern by the first special pattern display means 93, and is formed with an upward opening corresponding to the underside of the central drop section 80 provided on the stage 73. After being detected by the game ball detection means 112, the game ball that enters the first start winning opening 111 is guided to the rear of the game board 16 and ejected outside the machine. When a gaming ball enters the first start winning opening 111, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out per ball that enters. In addition, an outlet 114 is provided below the first start winning unit 55, corresponding to the most downstream position of the gaming area 23. Gaming balls that enter the outlet 114 are guided to the rear of the gaming board 16 and ejected outside the machine.

Here, the first special symbol display means (first symbol display means) 93 is configured as a seven-segment display means or the like capable of variably displaying one or more first special symbols (first symbols), for example, one first special symbol. When a gaming ball enters the first start winning slot 111 and is detected by the gaming ball detection means 112 (when the symbol start condition is met), the first special symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined period of time. If the jackpot determination random number value included in the first special random number information (first random number information) acquired when the gaming ball is detected by the gaming ball detection means 112 matches a predetermined jackpot determination value, the first special symbol stops in the first jackpot mode; otherwise, the first special symbol stops in the first miss mode. If the stopped symbol after the first special symbol display means 93 changes to the first jackpot mode (first specific mode), a special advantage state (advantage state) occurs. The special advantage state will be described later. Furthermore, while game balls that have flowed down the left flow area 76 can enter the first start winning hole 111, game balls that have flowed down the right flow area 77 cannot (or it is very difficult) to enter the first start winning hole 111.

The second start winning means 56 is an actuated winning means that is located downstream of the start gate unit 54 in the right flow-down area 77, on the front mounting plate 71 on the right side of the central display frame unit 52. It includes a second start winning opening 115 formed in the front mounting plate 71, an opening/closing member 116 that can change this second start winning opening 115 between a closed state in which game balls cannot (or are difficult to) enter and an open state in which they are easier to enter, and game ball detection means 117 that detects game balls that have entered the second start winning opening 115.

The second start winning opening 115 is a winning opening for initiating the variation of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display means 94, and is formed as a forward-facing opening. The opening/closing member 116 can swing, for example, around a left-right rotation axis located on the lower side. In the closed state, it is approximately flush with the front mounting plate 71, closing the second start winning opening 115 and allowing game balls to pass through the front side. In the open state, it slopes downward from the rear in front of the front mounting plate 71, guiding game balls into the second start winning opening 115. When the normal symbol on the normal symbol display means 91 stops in a winning state after varying (when a predetermined opening condition is met), this opening/closing member 116 changes from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period of time under the control of the normal profit state generating means configured on the main control board, thereby placing the second start winning opening 115 in a state where game balls can (or easily) enter (normal profit state). A gaming ball that enters the second start winning opening 115 is detected by the gaming ball detection means 117, then guided to the rear of the gaming board 16 and ejected outside the machine. A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out for each gaming ball that enters the second start winning opening 115.

Here, the second special symbol display means (second symbol display means) 94 is composed of a display means such as a seven-segment display capable of variably displaying one or more second special symbols (second symbols), for example, one second symbol. When a gaming ball enters the second start winning slot 115 that has opened during a normal winning state and the gaming ball detection means 117 detects this (when the symbol start condition is met), the second special symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined period of time, and if the jackpot determination random number value included in the second special random number information (second random number information) acquired when the gaming ball is detected by the gaming ball detection means 117 matches a predetermined jackpot determination value, the second special symbol stops in the second jackpot mode; otherwise, the second special symbol stops in the second miss mode. When the stopped symbol after the change of the second special symbol display means 94 becomes the second jackpot mode (second specific mode), a special winning state (profit state) occurs.

If a gaming ball enters the first or second start winning slot 111, 115 during a special reservation period, including when the first special symbol display means 93 is changing symbols, when the second special symbol display means 94 is changing symbols, and during a special benefit state, the first or second special random number information acquired thereby is reserved and stored in a predetermined reservation memory means (first or second reservation memory means) up to a predetermined upper limit of reserved numbers, for example, four each, until it is used to change symbols by the first or second special symbol display means. If, at the end of the special reservation period, there is one or more reserved memories on the second special symbol side (when the symbol change start condition for the second special symbol is met), the reserved memories for the second special symbol are consumed and the second special symbol changes; if there is only one or more reserved memories on the first special symbol side (when the symbol change start condition for the first special symbol is met), the reserved memories for the first special symbol are consumed and the first special symbol changes. In this embodiment, both the first and second special symbols will never be fluctuating at the same time, and if there are reserved memories on both the first and second special symbols, the second special symbol will be prioritized. The first and second special reserved numbers (first and second reserved numbers), which are the number of stored first and second special random number information, are notified to the player by the numbers of first and second reserved images X1-X4 and Y1-Y4 displayed on the LCD display means 58, as described below.

The special prize unit 57 is positioned along the guide rail 51 downstream of the second start-up prize-winning means 56 in the right-hand flow-down area 77, and is detachably attached from the front to a longitudinally penetrating attachment hole formed in the base plate 45. The special prize unit 57 includes a special prize opening 121, an opening/closing member 122 that can change the special prize opening 121 between an open state allowing game balls to enter and a closed state preventing balls from entering, one or more (e.g., one) normal prize opening 123, one or more (e.g., one) outlet 124, a game ball detection means 125 that detects game balls that have entered the special prize opening 121, and a game ball detection means 126 that detects game balls that have entered the normal prize opening 123.

A left-downward inclined surface 128 is provided at the upper front of the special prize unit 57 to guide game balls toward the inside (left side) of the play area 23. The special prize opening 121 is formed on the inclined surface 128 as a horizontally elongated, generally rectangular shape that opens generally upward. The opening/closing member 122 is a plate-shaped member corresponding to the special prize opening 121, formed with a left-downward inclination to match the inclined surface 128, and is slidable back and forth between a closed state in which it protrudes forward from the front surface of the base plate 45 to close the special prize opening 121, and an open state in which it retracts to the rear of the special prize opening 121 to open it. After a game ball enters the special prize opening 121, it is detected by the game ball detection means 125, guided to the rear of the game board 16, and ejected outside the machine. When the opening/closing member 122 is in the closed state, game balls that fall onto the inclined surface 128 are guided downstream (to the left) by the opening/closing member 122, etc.

When the first and second special symbols on the first and second special symbol display means 93, 94 change and then stop in the first or second jackpot mode (specific mode), the opening/closing member 122 of the special prize unit 57 opens according to a predetermined opening pattern, allowing game balls flowing down the inclined surface 128 to enter the special prize opening 121 (special advantage mode). Here, the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 122 is configured to execute a predetermined unit opening operation for a predetermined number of rounds, such as 5R or 10R. A unit opening operation is an operation in which the special prize opening 121 is closed (switched from the open state to the closed state) after a predetermined maximum time (e.g., 28 seconds) has elapsed since the special prize opening 121 was opened (switched from the closed state to the open state), or after a predetermined maximum number of game balls (e.g., 9 balls) have entered the special prize opening 121. A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out for each game ball that enters the special prize opening 121.

After the special advantage state ends, there is a predetermined probability that a special game state advantageous to the player will occur. In this embodiment, after the special advantage state ends, either a time-saving state or a probability variable state will occur, depending on the jackpot pattern random number value when the jackpot determination random number value included in the first and second special random number information matches the jackpot determination value.

During the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the first and second special symbols is switched to a shortened fluctuation time that is shorter than the normal fluctuation time, the probability that the normal symbols will become a winning symbol is switched from the normal probability (e.g., 1/10) to a high probability (e.g., 1/1.3), the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is switched from the normal fluctuation time (e.g., 27 seconds) to a shortened fluctuation time (e.g., 2.7 seconds), and the opening and closing pattern of the second start winning slot 115 is switched from the normal opening and closing pattern (e.g., 0.2 seconds x 1 opening) to an extended opening and closing pattern (e.g., 2 seconds x 3 openings). The time-saving state begins after the special advantage state ends and ends when the next special advantage state occurs or when the first and second special symbols have changed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 50 times).

During the probability variable state, the probability that the first and second special symbols will become the first and second jackpot patterns is switched to a higher probability (e.g., 1/35) than the normal probability (e.g., 1/350). Furthermore, during the probability variable state, switching is also generally performed in the same way as in the time-saving state. The probability variable state begins after the special advantage state ends and ends when the next special advantage state occurs, although other termination conditions, such as the number of times the first and second special symbols change, may also be added.

The normal prize opening 123 is located on the downstream side (left side) of the inclined surface 128 on which the big prize opening 121 is located, with an upward opening. A gaming ball that falls onto the inclined surface 128 and flows downstream without entering the big prize opening 121 is guided by multiple gaming pegs arranged above the normal prize opening 123, resulting in a high probability of the ball entering the normal prize opening 123. After being detected by the gaming ball detection means 126, the gaming ball is guided to the rear of the gaming board 16 and discharged outside the machine. A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out for each ball that enters the normal prize opening 123. The outlet opening 124 is located adjacent to the upstream side (i.e., the right side) of the inclined surface 128. A gaming ball that enters the outlet opening 124 is guided to the rear of the gaming board 16 and discharged outside the machine.

Next, the LCD display means 58, movable presentation means 59, fixed decorative means (decorative member) 60, and other components located behind the base plate 45 will be described with reference to Figures 3 to 6. The LCD display means 58 has a rectangular display screen 58a, and is located behind the display window 74 so that the display screen 58a is, for example, vertically long, and is supported by a rear support member 61.

The movable effect means 59 comprises a movable body 141, movable body guide means 142 that movably supports the movable body 141, and drive means (not shown) that drives the movable body 141. The movable body 141 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape, and its front side is a decorative surface 143 that is decorated with optional decorations such as the model's main character or logo (in this case, a decoration of an airplane with Kappa, the main character of the gaming machine, on board). Inside is an LED board 151 that has a large number of LEDs 151a that can illuminate the decorative surface 143 by shining light in a generally forward direction.

The movable body guide means 142 supports the movable body 141 so that it can move in a predetermined direction (here, the up-and-down direction) along the front side of the display screen 58a of the LCD display means 58. It is arranged along both the left and right sides of the LCD display means 58 and is removably fixed to the front side of the rear wall portion 62 of the rear support member 61. The movable body guide means 142 has a pair of left and right guide rails 142a arranged in the up-and-down direction, and each of these guide rails 142a supports both the left and right ends of the movable body 141 so that it can move up and down.

Driven by a drive means such as a stepping motor, the movable body 141 is guided by the movable body guide means 142 and can move vertically between an upper position above the liquid crystal display means 58 (shown by a solid line in FIG. 5) and a lower position in front of the liquid crystal display means 58 (shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 6). The movable body 141 is normally held in the upper position, which is its original position. The upper position (original position) of the movable body 141 is set above the display window 74 and behind the upper decorative frame 72b, and the lower position (performance position) of the movable body 141 is set within the display window 74 (here, approximately the center in the vertical direction). Therefore, the movable body 141 is normally retracted above the display window 74 and behind the upper decorative frame 72b (original position). At a predetermined timing, such as during a reach performance, the movable body 141 descends to the lower position, which is its performance position, and appears within the display window 74 so as to partially conceal the display screen 58a of the liquid crystal display means 58.

In addition, in this embodiment, the fixed decorative means 60 fixedly arranged on the rear side of the base plate 45 include an upper fixed decorative means 60a corresponding to the upper side of the display window 74, a lower fixed decorative means 60b corresponding to the lower side of the display window 74, a left fixed decorative means 60c corresponding to the left side of the display window 74, and a right fixed decorative means 60d corresponding to the right side of the display window 74.

The upper fixed decorative means 60a is horizontally elongated and roughly rectangular, and is located behind the base plate 45 and in front of the movable body 141 and LCD display means 58, corresponding to the area above the display window 74 in the play area 23. As a result, the area above the display window 74 of the display screen 58a of the LCD display means 58 is almost entirely located behind the upper fixed decorative means 60a. The front side of the upper fixed decorative means 60a is a decorative surface 145 decorated with optional decorations (not shown), and inside is an LED board 152 equipped with a number of LEDs 152a that can illuminate the decorative surface 145 by emitting light generally forward.

The lower fixed decorative means 60b is horizontally elongated and roughly rectangular, and is located behind the stage 73 and in front of the LCD display means 58. Part of the upper side is located within the display window 74 when viewed from the front, and the other part is located below the display window 74, i.e., behind the stage 73, etc. The front side of the lower fixed decorative means 60b is a decorative surface 146 decorated with arbitrary decoration (in this case, the characters "Kappa Legend," the title of the gaming machine), and inside is an LED board 153 equipped with numerous LEDs 153a that can illuminate the decorative surface 146 by shining light generally forward.

The left fixed decorative means 60c is located behind the base plate 45 and in front of the LCD display means 58, corresponding to the area extending from the left side of the display window 74 to the lower left side. The front side of the left fixed decorative means 60c is a decorative surface 147 with optional decoration (not shown), and an LED board 154 with multiple LEDs 154a that can illuminate the decorative surface 147 by emitting light in a generally forward direction is located inside. The right fixed decorative means 60d is located behind the base plate 45 and in front of the LCD display means 58, corresponding to the area extending from the right side of the display window 74 to the lower right side. The front side of the right fixed decorative means 60d is a decorative surface 148 with optional decoration (not shown), and an LED board 155 with multiple LEDs 155a that can illuminate the decorative surface 148 by emitting light in a generally forward direction is located inside.

Next, we will explain the effects that are centered around image display on the LCD display means 58. The effect means used for this effect include the LCD display means 58, as well as light-emitting means such as the LED 28a on the front frame 3 and the LEDs 151a-155a on the game board 16, audio output means such as speakers 18 and 25, and the movable body 141. Various effects are executed by controlling these means by effect execution means constituted by the effect control board.

The LCD display means 58 displays various effect images, notification images, etc., and as shown in Figure 3, comprises a decorative pattern display means 161, a mini pattern display means 162, a reserved image display means 163, etc. In parallel with the first and second special pattern display means 93, 94 displaying the changing first and second special patterns, the decorative pattern display means 161 can display the changing decorative pattern 164, and the mini pattern display means 162 can display the changing mini pattern 165. In addition, the reserved image display means 163 can display various images such as first and second reserved images X1-X4, Y1-Y4 indicating the number of first and second special reserved items.

The decorative symbol display means 161 is configured to enable the LCD display means 58 to variably display decorative symbols 164 based on the entry of a game ball into the first or second start winning slot 111, 115 (the fulfillment of a predetermined symbol start condition). The decorative symbols 164 include a left decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) 164a that is variably displayed on the left edge of the display screen 58a, a right decorative symbol (second decorative symbol) 164b that is variably displayed on the right edge of the display screen 58a, and a middle decorative symbol (third decorative symbol) 164c that is variably displayed approximately in the center of the left-right direction of the display screen 58a. Each of the decorative symbols 164a-164c is composed of an endless row of multiple symbols. Each decorative design 164a-164c has a main body (number portion) 166 made up of numbers such as "1" to "8" and other elements, and characters and other decorative portions 167 attached to this main body 166. It can be changed to multiple display modes, including a non-decorative display mode in which the main body 166 is displayed but the decorative portion 167 is not, and a decorative display mode in which both the main body 166 and the decorative portion 167 are displayed, and it is also possible to enlarge, reduce, change the display position, etc.

The decorative symbols 164a-164c begin to change simultaneously, such as by vertical scrolling, according to a predetermined pattern at approximately the same time as the first and second special symbols begin to change, and stop in a predetermined order (such as left, right, and center) or approximately simultaneously, so as to finally stop in time with the first and second special symbols stopping to change. When the decorative symbols 164a-164c stop in a combination (predetermined combination) of all the same symbols, such as "2-2-2" or "7-7-7," a jackpot presentation is displayed; otherwise, a miss presentation is displayed. When the first and second special symbols form the first and second jackpot presentations, the decorative symbols 164a-164c will form the jackpot presentation, and when the first and second special symbols form the first and second miss presentations, the decorative symbols 164a-164c will form the miss presentation. The decorative pattern display means 161 is not limited to arranging the decorative patterns 164a-164c in the left-right direction and changing them by vertical scrolling, etc. For example, the decorative patterns 164a-164c may be arranged in the up-down direction and changed by horizontal scrolling, etc.

The variation pattern of decorative symbol 164 begins with a normal variation in which each row of decorative symbols 164a to 164c varies. If a reach state such as "2 ↓ 2" or "7 ↓ 7" is achieved during this normal variation, it is configured to go through one or more reach effects (N reach, S reach, SP reach, etc.) before finally stopping. A reach variation pattern is when the normal variation develops into a reach effect and results in a jackpot or miss effect, while a normal variation pattern is when the normal variation develops into a miss effect without developing into a reach effect.

The mini symbol display means 162 executes a mini symbol change effect that displays mini symbols in synchronization with the symbol changes by the first and second special symbol display means 93, 94. The mini symbol 165 can be displayed by the liquid crystal display means 58 in response to the display of the decorative symbol 164 change based on the entry of a game ball into the first and second start winning slots 111, 115. The decorative symbol 164 is not necessarily always displayed even while the first and second special symbols are changing, and some or all of it may disappear from the screen depending on the content of the effect, such as a reach effect. Meanwhile, the mini symbol 165 is always displayed on the liquid crystal display means 58 while the first and second special symbols are changing. Note that the mini symbol 165 may disappear from the screen for a portion of the period during which the first and second special symbols are changing. Furthermore, the mini symbol 165 may be difficult or impossible to see for a portion of the period during which the movable body 141 moves.

Mini symbols 165 share the same number of symbol rows (here, three) and the types of symbols (here, numerals "1" through "8") that make up each symbol row as decorative symbols 164, but have only a main body consisting of numbers such as "1" through "8" and no decorative parts. As shown in FIG. 3, mini symbols 165 are displayed smaller than decorative symbols 164, near the periphery of display screen 58a. Furthermore, mini symbols 165 are only displayed in a "stopped state" and a "high-speed changing state." Unlike decorative symbols 164, mini symbols 165 do not undergo speed changes (such as deceleration or frame advance). When the first and second special symbols begin to change, they instantly switch from a stopped state based on a predetermined start result, or from the previous stop result, to a predetermined start result, and then transition to a high-speed changing state in which each symbol row circulates at a predetermined speed. When the first and second special symbols stop changing, the state switches from the high-speed changing state to a stopped state based on a predetermined stop result. The speed at which the mini symbols 165 fluctuate at high speed is always constant, and as shown in Figure 11, the liquid crystal display means 58, which displays moving images at a predetermined frame rate (e.g., 60 fps), displays the mini symbols 165 at high speed at a speed at which the symbol row completes one cycle every N frames.

Furthermore, for decorative symbols 164, the stop symbol for the next change becomes the start symbol for the next change, but for mini symbols 165, a predetermined start symbol is always used. At the start of the change, the stop symbol for the previous change is instantly switched to the specified start symbol, and then high-speed change begins from that start symbol. This is because if the previous change was a missed-reach change or a jackpot change, starting the change of mini symbols 165 using that stop symbol as the start symbol would result in high-speed change with the symbols on the left and right, or all symbols, aligned, potentially giving the player the misconception that they are about to reach or hit again. Therefore, the start symbol for mini symbols 165 must be set to a symbol unrelated to reach or hit, such as "1, 3, 5." The stop symbol for mini symbols 165 is the same as the stop symbol for decorative symbols 164.

The reserve image display means 163 executes a reserve display effect that displays a reserve image indicating the number of random number information stored in the reserve memory means, and is configured to display first and second reserve images X1-X4, Y1-Y4, etc., indicating the number of first and second special reserves, superimposed on a predetermined reserve base image 168, on the LCD display means 58, as shown in FIG. 3. The reserve image display means 163 displays an additional first and second reserve image X1-, Y1- on the reserve base image 168 when the number of first and second special reserves increases based on a game ball entering the first and second start winning slots 111, 115, and shifts the first and second reserve images X1-, Y1- by one position toward the front of the queue (e.g., toward the right side of the screen) when the number of first and second special reserves decreases based on the start of a new variation of the first and second special patterns by the first and second special pattern display means 93, 94. The reserved base image 168 is displayed on or near the periphery of the display screen 58a, and in this embodiment is displayed horizontally along the bottom edge of the display screen 58a.

Next, we will briefly explain the flow of gameplay in this pachinko machine. In this pachinko machine, during normal game mode other than the special game mode, even if a game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 106, causing the normal symbol display means 91 to change, and the normal symbol becomes a winning symbol, generating a normal profit state, the opening time (normal opening time) of the second start winning hole 115 to start the change of the second special symbol is very short (e.g., 0.2 seconds). Therefore, even if a player fires a game ball aiming toward the right flow area 77 where the normal symbol start gate 106 and second start winning hole 115 are located (hereinafter referred to as a "right hit"), the chances of the ball entering the second start winning hole 115 are extremely low. On the other hand, the difficulty of entering the first start winning hole 111, which is a non-operating winning hole, does not change depending on the game mode, and stable ball entry can be expected even during the normal game mode.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, due to the existence of a route from the warp ball entry port 78 through the stage 73 to the first start entry port 111, game balls flowing down the left flow down area (first flow down area) 76 are more likely to enter the first start entry port (first start entry means) 111 than game balls flowing down the right flow down area (second flow down area) 77. Therefore, rather than immediately hitting right during normal game mode, aiming for the normal symbol start gate 106 and second start entry port 115 on the right flow down area 77 side, it is desirable for the player to first fire the game ball at the left flow down area 76 side (hereinafter referred to as "left hit"), where there is a greater chance of the ball entering the first start entry port 111, in order to trigger the special game mode (left hit period).

When a game ball enters the first start winning slot 111 during normal play, the first special symbol display means 93 changes the first special symbol. Simultaneously, the decorative symbol display means 161 changes the decorative symbol 164 on the LCD display means 58, and the mini symbol display means 162 changes the mini symbol 165. If the first special symbol stops in the first jackpot pattern and the decorative symbol 161 stops in a jackpot presentation pattern such as "7-7-7," a special benefit state occurs, and the large winning slot 121 opens according to a predetermined opening pattern. The player then hits the ball to the right, aiming toward the right flow-down area 77 where the large winning slot 121 is located (right-hit period). When a player hits the ball to the right during a special profit state, the ball that is launched will enter the right flow-down area 77 from the top of the play area 23, and many of them will enter the open big prize slot 121, allowing the player to enjoy a large profit.

When the special advantage state ends, a special game state (probability variable state or time-saving state) will begin with a predetermined probability. During the special game state (probability variable state or time-saving state), normal symbols will win with a high probability (e.g., 1/1.3). Therefore, if the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 106, there is a high probability that a normal advantage state will occur after the normal symbol changes, and the second start winning hole 115 will open for a long period of time (e.g., 2 seconds x 3). Therefore, during this special game state, it is recommended that the player continue to hit to the right, aiming toward the right flow-down area 77 where the normal symbol start gate 106 and second start winning hole 115 are located (right hit period).

When a gaming ball enters the second start winning slot 115, the second special symbol is varied by the second special symbol display means 94. At the same time, the decorative symbol 164 is varied by the decorative symbol display means 161 and the mini symbol 165 is varied by the mini symbol display means 162 on the LCD display means 58. If the second special symbol stops in the second jackpot pattern and the decorative symbol 161 stops in a jackpot presentation pattern such as "7-7-7," a special benefit state occurs, and after the special benefit state ends, a special game state (probability variable state or time-saving state) begins with a predetermined probability. Furthermore, when the special game state (probability variable state or time-saving state) ends, the game transitions to the normal game state and the left-hand hit period begins again.

Figure 7 is a block diagram of the control system of this pachinko machine. In Figure 7, 301 is the main control board and 302 is the effect control board, and these control boards 301, 302 are each housed in a board case that is detachably attached to an appropriate location on the back of the game board 16. Note that in the block diagram of Figure 7, boards other than the main control board 301 and the effect control board 302 are omitted.

The main control board 301 controls the overall game operation and is equipped with a normal random number creation processing means 311, a normal start gate check processing means 312, a normal random number storage means 313, a normal symbol processing means 314, a normal symbol display control means 315, a normal reserved number display control means 316, a normal profit state generation means 317, a special random number creation processing means 321, a special start gate check processing means 322, a special random number storage means 323, a special symbol processing means 324, a special symbol display control means 325, a special profit state generation means 326, a special game state generation means 327, a control command transmission means 328, etc., which are composed of a CPU, ROM, RAM, etc.

The normal random number creation processing means 311 is configured to repeatedly generate, at predetermined time intervals, win determination random numbers and the like used to determine whether a normal symbol after a change is a winning pattern. The normal start gate check processing means 312 performs processing based on the detection of a gaming ball by the normal symbol start gate 106, and is configured to obtain normal random number information such as the win determination random number value created by the normal random number creation processing means 311 based on the gaming ball passing through the normal symbol start gate 106 and being detected by the gaming ball detection means 107, and store this normal random number information in the first-in, first-out normal random number storage means 313, up to a predetermined upper limit on the number of reserved items (e.g., four).

The normal symbol processing means 314 performs processing related to the variable display of normal symbols. When the normal symbol display means 91 is in a state where variable display is possible and one or more pieces of normal random number information are stored in the normal random number storage means 313 (the number of normal reserved pieces is one or more), it retrieves a win/loss determination random number value from the head of the queue of normal random number information stored in the normal random number storage means 313, determines whether the win/loss determination random number value matches a predetermined win/loss determination value (win lottery), and selects the type of symbol to stop after the normal symbol changes based on the win/loss determination result (lottery result), as well as the time for the normal symbol to change.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning during special game modes (time-saving mode and special mode) (e.g., 1/1.3) is set higher than the probability of winning during other normal game modes (e.g., 1/10), and the variable time during special game modes (e.g., 2.7 seconds) is set shorter than the variable time during normal game modes (e.g., 27 seconds).

The normal pattern display control means 315 controls the display of the normal pattern display means 91 based on the normal pattern processing by the normal pattern processing means 314, and starts the normal pattern variation by the normal pattern display means 91 on the condition that the normal pattern display means 91 is in a state where it can display variations and one or more normal random number information is stored in the normal random number storage means 313 (the number of normal reserved items is one or more), and stops the variation of the normal pattern at the stop pattern selected by the normal pattern processing means 314 based on the elapse of the variation time selected by the normal pattern processing means 314.

The regular hold number display control means 316 controls the display of the regular hold number by the regular hold number display means 92, and is configured to switch the display mode of the regular hold number display means 92 to a display mode corresponding to the regular hold number after the increase/decrease when the regular hold number increases/decreases.

When the normal symbol processing means 314 determines that a win has been made and the stopped symbol after the normal symbol display means 91 has changed becomes a winning symbol, the normal win state generating means 317 generates a normal win state in which the opening/closing member 116 of the second start winning means 56 changes to an open state according to, for example, one of a plurality of opening/closing patterns. In this embodiment, two opening/closing patterns are set: a normal opening/closing pattern (e.g., 0.2 seconds x 1 opening) and an extended opening/closing pattern (e.g., 2 seconds x 3 openings) which is set to have a longer opening time than the normal opening/closing pattern. The normal opening/closing pattern is selected during the normal game state, and the extended opening/closing pattern is selected during the special game state.

The special random number creation processing means 321 is configured to perform special random number creation processing that repeatedly generates jackpot determination random numbers used to determine jackpot/loss, pattern determination random numbers used to select the stopping pattern after the special pattern changes, fluctuation pattern random numbers used to select the fluctuation pattern, and other predetermined random numbers.

The special start port check processing means 322 performs processing based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first or second start entry port 111, 115. Based on the entry of a gaming ball into either the first or second start entry port 111, 115, it obtains first and second special random number information (first and second random number information) such as a jackpot determination random number value and a jackpot pattern random number value created by the special random number creation processing means 321, and stores the first and second special random number information in the special random number storage means (first and second reserve storage means) 323 up to a predetermined upper limit of the reserve number (here, four).

The special start port check processing means 322 also includes a look-ahead determination means 322a. This look-ahead determination means 322a is configured to perform a look-ahead determination on the first and second special random number information acquired when a gaming ball enters the first and second start winning ports 111 and 115 at a predetermined timing (for example, when the first and second special random number information is acquired) before the pattern changes, to determine whether the jackpot determination random number value included in the first and second special random number information matches the first and second jackpot determination value (whether or not a jackpot has occurred). The look-ahead determination result is transmitted to the performance control board 302, for example, by a pending addition command sent based on the entry of a gaming ball into either the first or second start winning port 111 and 115. The look-ahead determination may be made based not only on whether or not a jackpot has occurred, but also on the type of variation pattern, etc.

The special symbol processing means 324 processes the variable display of the first and second special symbols, decorative symbol 164, etc. When the first and second special symbol display means 93, 94 are ready for variable display, it retrieves the first jackpot determination random number value from the queue for second special random number information (second random number information) if the second special reserved number is 1 or more, or from the queue for first special random number information (first random number information) if only the first special reserved number is 1 or more, and performs a jackpot/loss determination (jackpot lottery) depending on whether the jackpot determination random number value matches a predetermined jackpot determination value, and determines the stopped symbol mode of the first and second special symbols, the variable pattern of the decorative symbol 164 (variation time of the first and second special symbols), etc. depending on the jackpot determination result (lottery result).

If the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, the stopping pattern pattern of the first and second special symbols is selected from multiple types of jackpot patterns (first and second specific patterns) based on, for example, the jackpot pattern random number value contained in the first and second special random number information. If the jackpot determination result is a miss, the stopping pattern pattern is selected from one or more miss patterns based on, for example, a newly acquired miss pattern random number value. In this embodiment, in the case of a jackpot, the first and second special advantage states and the type of special game state (such as "10R guaranteed win" or "5R time-saving") are determined according to the selected jackpot pattern. The variation patterns of the decorative symbols 164 include a normal variation pattern that results in a miss presentation state without going through a reach state, and a reach variation pattern that results in a jackpot presentation state or a miss presentation state after going through a reach state.

The special symbol display control means 325 controls the display of the first and second special symbol display means 93, 94, and starts the variation of the first and second special symbols by the first special symbol display means 93 or the second special symbol display means 94 based on the special symbol processing by the special symbol processing means 324, and stops the variation of the first and second special symbols at the selected stopped symbol based on the elapse of the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern.

The special advantage state generating means (advantage state generating means) 326 generates a special advantage state (advantage state) advantageous to the player, and is configured to generate a special advantage state in which the large prize opening 121 opens in a predetermined opening pattern (for example, one of two opening patterns, 5R or 10R) when the result of the jackpot determination (lottery result) by the special symbol processing means 324 is a jackpot and the stopped symbol after the first and second special symbols change becomes a jackpot pattern (specific pattern).

The special game state generating means 327 generates a special game state advantageous to the player, and is configured to generate either a time-saving state or a special game state corresponding to the jackpot type after the special advantageous state ends.

The control command sending means 328 is used to send predetermined control commands to the performance control board 302, etc., to issue control instructions, and has the following functions: a hold addition command to the performance control board 302 that specifies an addition to the first and second special hold numbers when the first and second special hold numbers increase; a hold subtraction command to the performance control board 302 that specifies a subtraction of the first and second special hold numbers when the first and second special symbols start to change based on the special symbol processing by the special symbol processing means 324; a change pattern command that specifies the change pattern of the decorative symbol 164; and a special symbol command that specifies the stopping symbol mode of the first and second special symbols, in this order, to the performance control board 302; and a change stop command to the performance control board 302 that instructs the change to stop when the first and second special symbols have finished changing; and a customer waiting demo command when the first and second special symbols are waiting to change, for example, because the first and second special symbols have finished changing when both the first and second special hold numbers are 0.

The effect control board 302 controls the effects produced by various effect means such as LEDs or other effect lamps L, speakers 18, 25, movable effect means 59, and LCD display means 58, and is equipped with a hold addition command reception processing means 331, a variable pattern command reception processing means 332, and a hold special notification means 333. The effect lamps L that produce light-emitting effects can be broadly divided into those that use the LED 28a on the front frame 3 as the light source, and those that use the LEDs 151a-155a on the game board 16 as the light source. In the following explanation, the former will be referred to as "frame-side lamp La" and the latter as "board-side lamp Lb," and they will be collectively referred to as "effect lamps L" as needed.

The hold addition command reception processing means 331 performs processing when the number of first and second special holds increases, and is equipped with a look-ahead effect lottery means 331a, etc. When the hold addition command reception processing means 331 receives a hold addition command from the main control board 301, it performs a lottery for a look-ahead effect using the look-ahead effect lottery means 331a, except in cases where look-ahead is prohibited, etc. Here, a "look-ahead effect" is an effect based on the look-ahead determination result by the look-ahead determination means 322a, and includes a "look-ahead continuous effect," a "look-ahead hold change effect," etc.

The "pre-read consecutive performance" is a performance in which, based on the results of the pre-read judgment, the same performance is executed for multiple symbol changes up to the symbol change (target change) corresponding to the special random number information that was the subject of the pre-read judgment. For example, if two performance modes, "rain" and "thunder," are provided as pre-read consecutive performances, and one of these is selected by the pre-read performance lottery means 331a, the background image of "rain" or "thunder" will be used for multiple performance symbol changes up to the target change corresponding to the special random number information.

The "pre-read hold change effect" displays the first and second hold images X1-X4, Y1-Y4 in one of several hold display modes based on the pre-read judgment result. If the pre-read hold change effect is won by the pre-read effect lottery means 331a and one of several hold display modes is selected, when the first and second hold images X1-, Y1- are newly displayed, the hold images are displayed in the selected hold display mode.

The first and second reserved images X1-, Y1- have an arbitrary shape (circle in this case) and are available in four reserved display modes (display colors): "white," "blue," "yellow," and "red," as shown in Figure 8. Of these four reserved display modes, "white" is the normal display mode, and the remaining "blue," "yellow," and "red" are special display modes. The three special display modes indicate the reliability of a jackpot (jackpot reliability) for the pattern change corresponding to the reserved memory. For example, the jackpot reliability is set to increase in the order of "blue," "yellow," and "red." In the case of a prohibited pre-reading condition where no pre-reading judgment is made, or if the pre-reading reserved change effect is not selected in the lottery by the pre-reading effect lottery means 331a, the first and second reserved images X1-, Y1- are displayed in the normal display mode, "white." The reserved display mode may be configured to change at any time after the reserved image is additionally displayed in the normal display mode or a predetermined special display mode.

In addition, when the first and second reserve images X1-, Y1- are additionally displayed due to an increase in the number of first and second special reserves, a predetermined winning sound is output according to the reserve display mode. In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 8, when the reserve image is displayed in the normal display mode, a normal winning sound is output, and when it is displayed in one of the three special display modes, a reserve change sound different from the normal winning sound is output. Note that the reserve change sound may be different for each of the three special display modes.

In addition, the hold addition command reception processing means 331 performs a lottery for the above-mentioned pre-reading effects using the pre-reading effect lottery means 331a, and also performs hold increase processing using the hold image display means 163, outputs a winning sound, etc.

The variation pattern command reception processing means 332 performs processing when the first and second special pattern display means 93, 94 start varying patterns, and is equipped with a pattern variation content determination means 332a, etc. When a reserve subtraction command, a variation pattern command, and a special pattern command are received from the main control board 301, for example, within a certain period of time, the reserve image display means 163 executes a reserve reduction process, and the pattern variation content determination means 332a selects the specific variation content and preview effect of the decorative pattern 164, and depending on the results of these selections, etc., the decorative pattern display means 161 executes a variation display effect of the decorative pattern 164.

The special reserved notification means 333 is used to execute a special reserved notification in a predetermined notification manner, notifying the player that the first and second special reserved numbers have reached a predetermined number or more. Here, the "predetermined number" is set to, for example, three, which is less than the upper limit for the first and second special reserved numbers (here, four). This allows the player to reliably recognize in advance that the first and second special reserved numbers are likely to soon reach the upper limit without constantly monitoring the display of the first and second reserved images X1-, Y1-, etc., thereby effectively preventing the player from unintentionally wasting balls (wasting balls) when the reserved number has reached the upper limit (four).

In this embodiment, the reserved special notification means 333 is controlled so that it does not issue a reserved special notification during the special benefit state and the special game state, i.e., during the right-hand hit period. In this way, the reserved special notification is not issued during the right-hand hit period when it is possible for a game ball to enter the second start winning port 115. Therefore, in this embodiment, the reserved special notification is essentially only issued for the first special reserved number on the first special symbol side, and no special notification is issued for the second special reserved number on the second special symbol side.

As shown in Figure 9, the special reserve notification means 333 is capable of issuing three types of special reserve notifications: a "3 reserve notification" that notifies that the first special reserve number (or second special reserve number) has reached the predetermined number of 3; a "4 reserve notification" that notifies that the first special reserve number (or second special reserve number) has reached the upper limit of the reserve number of 4; and an "over prize notification" that notifies that an additional start prize has been awarded when the first special reserve number (or second special reserve number) has reached the upper limit of the reserve number (4) (hereinafter referred to as an over prize).

As shown in Figure 9, the notification modes used when a special reserved ball notification is executed include sound output from audio output means such as speakers 18 and 25 (hereinafter referred to as sound notification mode), as well as vibration from vibration means 34a (hereinafter referred to as vibration notification mode). In this embodiment, different sound notification modes are used for the three reserved ball notification, the four reserved ball notification, and the over-winning notification. For example, the first notification sound (here, "beep") is used for the three reserved ball notification, the second notification sound (here, "bubble") is used for the four reserved ball notification, and the third notification sound (here, "boo") is used for the over-winning notification. Similarly, the types of vibration notification are different for the three reserved ball notification, the four reserved ball notification, and the over-winning notification; for example, the first vibration (one short vibration in this case) is used for the three reserved ball notification, the second vibration (two short vibrations in this case) is used for the four reserved ball notification, and the third vibration (one long vibration in this case) is used for the over-winning notification.

In this embodiment, the over-winning notification is executed because there is a possibility that a player may not notice the 3-reserved ball notification or the 4-reserved ball notification and an over-winning may occur. However, if an over-winning occurs, it can be assumed that the player is not concerned about wasting shots, so the over-winning notification may not be executed. The number of notification modes executed for the 3-reserved ball notification and the 4-reserved ball notification may also be different. For example, the number of notification modes used for the 4-reserved ball notification may be greater than the number of notification modes used for the 3-reserved ball notification, such as by using both a sound notification mode and a vibration notification mode for the 3-reserved ball notification and only a sound notification mode for the 4-reserved ball notification. Conversely, the number of notification modes used for the 4-reserved ball notification may be less than the number of notification modes used for the 3-reserved ball notification, such as by using only a sound notification mode for the 3-reserved ball notification and only a sound notification mode for the 4-reserved ball notification.

Furthermore, because the special reserved ball notification is executed when the ball enters the start winning slot 111 (or the second start winning slot 115), the question arises as to how to set the priority with respect to the winning sound, which is executed at the same time. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10, the priority of the special reserved ball notification using the sound notification mode is set higher than the normal winning sound and lower than the reserve change sound. As a result, for example, if a game ball enters the start winning slot 111 when the first special reserved ball count is two, when the first reserved image X3 is displayed in the normal display mode, the normal winning sound is not output, and the special reserved ball notification is executed with the first notification sound ("beep") and the first vibration (one short vibration); and when the first reserved image X3 is displayed in the "yellow" special display mode, the reserve change sound is output, and the special reserved ball notification is executed with only the first vibration (one short vibration).

Furthermore, since the special pending notification in this embodiment involves vibration by the vibration means 34a, it is necessary to control power consumption so that it does not exceed the upper limit due to simultaneous operation with other drive means. Here, if the drive means or vibration means were to be activated using a variation pattern, it would be possible to appropriately set the operation timing of the drive means or vibration means in advance so that power consumption would not exceed the upper limit. However, when the vibration means is activated for the special pending notification, the timing of its operation cannot be predicted, making it impossible to pre-adjust the operation timing of the drive means for the variation pattern and the operation timing of the vibration means for the special pending notification. Therefore, in this embodiment, when a variation pattern involving the operation of the movable presentation means 59 is selected, the special pending notification using the vibration notification mode is not executed while the pattern is changing according to that variation pattern. This ensures that power consumption does not exceed the upper limit due to simultaneous operation of the vibration means 34a and the drive means of the movable presentation means 59, regardless of the timing at which the special pending notification is executed. Furthermore, if the movable presentation means 59 is configured to operate in a variation pattern with a high probability of winning a jackpot, the absence of vibration during the special pending notification can arouse the player's anticipation of a jackpot, which has the advantage of improving the presentation effect. Note that when a variation pattern involving the operation of the movable presentation means 59 is selected, the vibration notification of the special pending notification may be configured not to be executed during the entire period of pattern variation according to that variation pattern, but only during the operating period of the drive means of the movable presentation means 59.

In addition, there is a possibility that game balls may enter the start winning slot 111 (or the second start winning slot 115) consecutively within a short period of time, in which case the reserved special notification will also be executed consecutively. However, if the reserved special notification is executed consecutively, the player may mistake it for another notification. Therefore, in this embodiment, when a reserved special notification is executed in response to a game ball entering the start winning slot 111 (or the second start winning slot 115), if a game ball enters the start winning slot 111 (or the second start winning slot 115) within a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) of that ball, the reserved special notification will not be executed for that ball.

Next, specific examples of the effects that occur while the decorative pattern 164 is changing (there may be periods when at least part of the decorative pattern 164 is not displayed) will be explained, focusing on the image effects produced by the liquid crystal display means 58, the light-emitting effects produced by light-emitting means such as the LED 28a, and the audio output effects produced by the speakers 18, 25, etc.

Eight types of preview effects executed during symbol fluctuations will be explained below in order: step-up preview effect, reach preview effect, button preview effect 1, dialogue preview effect 1, pseudo consecutive preview effect, button preview effect 2, interrupt preview effect, and dialogue preview effect 2. These eight types of preview effects are selected and executed based on the jackpot reliability setting shown in FIG. 12. Here, "jackpot reliability" is an example of the reliability of a specified event occurring, and in this case refers to the reliability that decorative pattern 164 will become a jackpot presentation. After explaining these eight types of preview effects, several examples (reliability suggestion effect, reach title display effect, operation effect, reach development effect) of various effects that can be used as part of these various preview effects, etc. (hereinafter referred to as partial effects) will be explained.

Furthermore, the content explained below for each effect is not limited to each effect, and may be adopted for other effects. For example, the configuration of the high-brightness effect that appears in the step-up preview effect may be adopted in other preview effects such as reach preview effects and dialogue preview effects, or in partial effects such as reliability suggestion effects.

[Step Up Preview]
13 to 18 show examples of step-up notice effects that are executed during normal fluctuations in reach fluctuation patterns or normal fluctuation patterns. The step-up notice effects (specific notice effects) are effects that are executed up to a predetermined stage out of multiple stages (here, five stages) of effect steps according to the reliability of a jackpot, and are set so that the reliability of a jackpot increases as the stage of the effect steps progresses.

As shown in Figure 13, this step-up preview performance involves five characters - an elephant, lion, fox, squirrel, and bear - each corresponding to one of the five performance steps, from first to fifth, taking turns aiming and firing an arrow at a balloon. The performance steps progress until one of the characters fires an arrow that hits the balloon and bursts it, but first the step-up introduction performance ST0, which indicates the start of the step-up preview performance, is performed (Figure 13(a)). In this step-up introduction performance ST0, the five characters each aiming at the balloon appear all at once, suggesting the content of the step-up preview performance. Of course, the characters may appear in the order of the corresponding performance steps: elephant → lion → fox → squirrel → bear, or in any other order.

Following the step-up introduction performance ST0 (Figure 13(a)), the first step performance ST1 begins as the first stage. The first step performance ST1 is made up of a first first half performance ST1A and a first second half performance ST1B, with the first first half performance ST1A being executed first. In this first first half performance ST1A, a scene is played in which the first character, an elephant, fires an arrow (Figure 13(b1)), and if the arrow hits a balloon (Figure 13(d1)), it is determined that the performance step will end in the first stage, and the first second half performance ST1B is executed. The second half performance, including this first second half performance ST1B, will be described later.

On the other hand, if the arrow fired by the elephant does not hit the balloon (Figure 13 (c1)), the first second half performance ST1B is not executed, and the second first half performance ST2A of the second step performance ST2 begins as the second stage. In this second first half performance ST2A, a scene is played in which the second character, a lion, fires an arrow (Figure 13 (b2)). If the arrow hits the balloon (Figure 13 (d2)), it is determined that the performance step will end at that second stage, and the second second half performance ST2B is executed. In this way, arrows are fired in the order of the elephant, lion, fox, squirrel, and bear until an arrow fired by one of the characters hits the balloon (Figures 13 (b1) to (b5)). When the arrow hits the balloon (Figures 13 (d1) to (d5)), it is determined that the performance step will end at that stage, and the second half performances ST1B to ST5B corresponding to that stage are executed. In this embodiment, the step-up preview performance only goes up to the fifth stage, so the arrow shot by the bear in at least the fifth first half performance ST5A will always hit the balloon (Figure 13 (d5)).

In addition, in this embodiment of the step-up preview performance, multiple types (here, five types of each) of the first to fifth second half performances ST1B to ST5B are provided, and one of these multiple types is selected depending on the reliability of the occurrence of a specified event (here, the reliability of a jackpot).

Figure 14 illustrates five different variations (contexts) for each of the third second half performance ST3B and the fifth second half performance ST5B, among the first through fifth second half performances ST1B-ST5B. Of course, similar variations using the respective characters are also available for the other first, second, and fourth second half performances ST1B, ST2B, and ST4B, but these are omitted here. Note that in the first through fifth second half performances ST1B-ST5B, a reserved pedestal image 168 is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 58a, and a mini symbol 165 is displayed at the top of the display screen 58a. The first and second reserved images X1-X4, Y1-Y4, etc. are displayed in front of the reserved pedestal image 168, and a step-up preview performance image 169 is displayed behind the reserved pedestal image 168 and the mini symbol 165. However, the reserved pedestal image 168 may be displayed during the first half performance and not displayed during the second half performance. This allows for a larger display area for the latter half of the performance, which displays information about the jackpot reliability, making it possible to create more impactful display effects. The decorative pattern 164 that is currently changing is not displayed during the first through fifth latter half of the performances ST1B through ST5B.

The five types of third second half performances ST3Ba to ST3Be shown in Figures 14 (a1) to (e1) have in common the step-up preview performance image 169, in that the fox character of the third step performance ST3 appears, and in that they share a basic screen layout centered around the fox and a specified text image. However, they differ in the content of the displayed text image, the display mode of the text image (here, the display color), and the display color (base color) of at least a portion of the step-up preview performance image 169.

That is, the step-up preview performance images 169 of the third second half performances ST3Ba to ST3Be shown in Figures 14 (a1) to (e1) have in common the fact that a fox character image is displayed large in a position that divides the background image into a left background image and a right background image, and a text image consisting of a predetermined line string (which may consist of only one character) is displayed horizontally in front of the character image (fox) and the background image, spanning them. However, the content of the line string is different for all five types, and the content of the line string corresponding to the third second half performances ST3Ba to ST3Be is "Something good is going to happen," "Okay, let's do our best," "Even better things are going to happen," "It's going to be okay," and "I feel great," respectively. Additionally, the display colors (display modes) of the dialogue text are different for all five types, with the display colors (internal colors of the text) of the dialogue text corresponding to the third second half performances ST3Ba to ST3Be being "blue," "red," "gold," "danger color," and "rainbow," respectively. Here, "danger color" refers to a striped color scheme made up of multiple colors different from the rainbow, and in this embodiment, it is a diagonal striped color scheme of yellow, black, and red.

Furthermore, for the step-up preview performance images 169 of the third second half performances ST3Ba to ST3Bd (FIGS. 14(a1) to (d1)) other than the third second half performance ST3Be (FIG. 14(e1)), the base color corresponds to the display color of the dialogue text, and the colors "blue," "red," "gold," and "danger" are used in at least a portion (such as the right background image) of the step-up preview performance image 169, corresponding to the respective text colors of "blue," "red," "gold," and "danger." Here, the "danger color" as the base color is the same as the "danger color" as the text color in that it is composed of three colors: yellow, black, and red. However, it differs from the "danger color" as the text color in that the striped color scheme is only yellow and black, and the text "DANGER" is continuously arranged in red on the black line. Note that the configuration of the danger color is not limited to this, and may be different from the other text colors/base colors.

Furthermore, the five types of fifth second half performances ST5Ba to ST5Be shown in Figures 14 (a2) to (e2) have in common the step-up preview performance image 169, in that a bear, the character of the fifth step performance ST5, appears, and the basic screen layout is centered around the bear and a specified text image. However, the content of the text image displayed on the screen, the display mode of the text image (here, the display color), and the display color (base color) of at least a portion of the step-up preview performance image 169 are different.

That is, the step-up preview effect images 169 for the fifth second half performances ST5Ba-ST5Be shown in Figures 14(a2)-(e2) are common in that a large bear character image is displayed in a positional relationship that divides the background image into a left background image and a right background image, and a text image consisting of a predetermined dialogue string (which may consist of only one character) is displayed horizontally in front of the character image (bear) and the background image, spanning both the character image (bear) and the background image. However, the content of the dialogue string is different for all five types, with the dialogue strings corresponding to the fifth second half performances ST5Ba-ST5Be being "Maybe we can do it," "Almost there," "I'm feeling refreshed," "I'm getting excited," and "Very satisfied!" Furthermore, the display colors of the dialogue strings are also different for all five types, with the display colors (interior colors of the characters) of the dialogue strings corresponding to the fifth second half performances ST5Ba-ST5Be being "blue," "red," "gold," "danger," and "rainbow," respectively. As described above, the content of the dialogue strings in the fifth second half performances ST5Ba to ST5Be are all different from the content of the dialogue strings in the third second half performances ST3Ba to ST3Be, but the content of at least some of the dialogue strings may be the same.

Furthermore, for the step-up preview performance images 169 of the fifth second half performances ST5Ba to ST5Bd (Figures 14 (a2) to (d2)) other than the fifth second half performance ST5Be (Figure 14 (e2)), the base color of the screen corresponds to the display color of the dialogue text, and the colors "blue," "red," "gold," and "danger" are used in at least part of the screen (such as part of the background image) to correspond to the respective text colors of "blue," "red," "gold," and "danger."

Here, the jackpot reliability is set to gradually increase from the third second half performance ST3Ba to ST3Be and from the fifth second half performance ST5Ba to ST5Be. In other words, the relationship between the display color of the dialogue string and jackpot reliability is as follows: jackpot reliability increases in the order of "blue," "red," "gold," "danger," and "rainbow." Note that "rainbow" indicates a jackpot reliability of 100%, i.e., a guaranteed jackpot. In this way, the third second half performance ST3Ba to ST3Be and the fifth second half performance ST5Ba to ST5Be have different jackpot reliability depending on the display color of the dialogue string, so the text image (specific text information) or the step-up preview performance image 169 containing that text image can be considered a specific image containing jackpot reliability information. The same is true for the other first, second, and fourth second half performances.

For example, the third second half effect ST3Ba (FIG. 14(a1)) and the fifth second half effect ST5Ba (FIG. 14(a2)) are examples of the A1 reliability specific image corresponding to the A1 reliability level, and the third second half effect ST3Bb (FIG. 14(b1)) and the fifth second half effect ST5Bb (FIG. 14(b2)) are examples of the A2 reliability specific image corresponding to the A2 reliability level. In this embodiment, the five display colors used in this step-up preview effect - "blue," "red," "gold," "danger," and "rainbow" - represent the full lineup of reliability information related to jackpots (reliability information related to the occurrence of a specified event), and are set in order of increasing jackpot reliability. However, in other preview effects, it is not necessary to use all five display colors as reliability information; only some of the colors, such as "red" and "gold," may be used. However, even in this case, the relationship between the high and low reliability of jackpots (for example, "gold" is higher than "red") remains unchanged.

The base color of the step-up preview effect image 169 does not need to be exactly the same as the text color; it can be a similar color. Also, for the third second half effect ST3Be, fifth second half effect ST5Be, etc., where the text color is rainbow, the base color of the screen can be made to correspond to the text color by making the display color of at least some of the text other than the dialogue text the same. In this embodiment, the display modes other than the display color of the dialogue text, such as the font and size of the dialogue text, are generally the same for the five types of third second half effect ST3Ba-ST3Be and fifth second half effect ST5Ba-ST5Be, etc.; however, other display modes (font, etc.) may be different along with the text color. Alternatively, the text color may be roughly the same and other specific display modes (font, etc.) may be different, and the specific display mode may be used as reliability information.

Next, a specific example of this step-up preview effect will be explained using the example where the effect step has progressed to the third stage and ST3Bc (Figure 14 (c1)) is selected as the third latter half effect, but first an overview will be provided with reference to Figure 15. When the step-up preview effect begins during normal fluctuation in the reach fluctuation pattern, BGM1 related to this step-up preview effect begins to be output as background music from speakers 18, 25, and the decorative pattern 164 that is rapidly fluctuating on the display screen 58a disappears, and the reserved base image 168 is displayed at the bottom and the mini pattern 165 is displayed at the top, with the effect image related to the step-up introduction effect ST0 displayed behind them (Figure 15 (a)).

In this step-up introduction effect ST0, a step-up preview effect image 169 is displayed, showing five characters—an elephant, a lion, a fox, a squirrel, and a bear—corresponding to the five presentation steps, each preparing to fire an arrow at a balloon. Seeing this, a player can recognize that this is a step-up preview effect, in which the presentation steps will progress until one of the characters pops the balloon. Furthermore, during this step-up introduction effect ST0 (FIG. 15(a)), for example, at the start, a predetermined introductory sound is output from speakers 18 and 25 as a sound effect. Furthermore, during this step-up introduction effect ST0 (FIG. 15(a)), at least a portion of the presentation lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) emit light in an introduction illumination mode corresponding to this step-up introduction effect ST0, for example, orange. Note that "at least a portion of the effect lamps L" may refer to either the frame-side lamps La or the panel-side lamps Lb, or both, or at least one of a portion of the frame-side lamps La and a portion of the panel-side lamps Lb. This applies to all of the following explanations.

Following the step-up introduction performance ST0 (Figure 15(a)), one or more step performances from the first stage to a predetermined stage, here the first step performance ST1 to the third step performance ST3, are executed sequentially. That is, the first first half performance ST1A of the first step performance ST1 begins as the first stage (Figure 15(b)). In this first half performance ST1A, the first character, an elephant, fires an arrow at a balloon, but fails to hit the balloon.

Furthermore, during this first first half performance ST1A (Figure 15(b)), for example at the start, a predetermined first start sound is output from speakers 18, 25 as a sound effect, and then following this first start sound, a first first half voice such as "Let's go" is output as a dialogue sound. Note that the output of the first first half voice may begin after the output of the first start sound has finished, or may begin while the first start sound is being output. Furthermore, during this first first half performance ST1A (Figure 15(b)), at least a portion of the performance lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) emit light in a first half light-emitting mode corresponding to the first half performance (first light-emitting mode corresponding to the first half performance), for example, green.

When the arrow fired by the elephant misses the balloon, the first first half performance ST1A ends, and the second first half performance ST2A of the second step performance ST2 begins (Figure 15 (c)). In this second first half performance ST2A, the second character, the lion, fires an arrow at the balloon, but, as with the first step performance ST1, he is unable to hit the balloon.

Furthermore, during this second first half performance ST2A (Figure 15(c)), for example at the start, a predetermined second start sound is output from speakers 18, 25 as a sound effect, and then following this second start sound, a second first half voice such as "This time for sure" is output as a dialogue sound. The second start sound may be the same as or different from the first start sound. Furthermore, the output of the second first half voice may begin after the output of the second start sound has finished, or may begin while the second start sound is being output. Furthermore, during this second first half performance ST2A (Figure 15(c)), at least some of the performance lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) continue to emit light in a first half light-emitting mode corresponding to the first half performance, for example, green.

When the arrow fired by the lion misses the balloon, the second first half performance ST2A ends, and the third first half performance ST3A of the third step performance ST3 begins (Figure 15(d)). In this third first half performance ST3A, the third character, the fox, fires an arrow at the balloon, and in the example of Figure 15, the arrow successfully hits the balloon (Figure 15(d)).

During this third first half performance ST3A (Figure 15(d)), for example, at the start, a predetermined third start sound is output from speakers 18, 25 as a sound effect, and then following this third start sound, a third first half voice such as "How's that?" is output as a dialogue sound. The third start sound may be the same as or different from the first and second start sounds. The output of the third first half voice may begin after the output of the third start sound has finished, or may begin while the third start sound is being output. Furthermore, during this third first half performance ST2A (Figure 15(d)), at least some of the performance lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) continue to emit light in a first half light-emitting mode corresponding to the first half performance, for example, green, until just before the arrow hits the balloon, and then transition to a first half end light-emitting mode, for example, a brief off state, when or just before the arrow hits the balloon.

The first half light emission pattern may be different for each of the first half performances ST1A to ST5A. In this case, the light emission pattern may be changed, for example, when the second starting sound, third starting sound, etc. is heard. This configuration makes it easier for players to sense the step-up stage. The light emission pattern may also be temporarily changed when the second starting sound, third starting sound, etc. is heard. In this case, the light emission pattern will not change for the first to fifth first half performances ST1A to ST5A, but will be emitted in a different light emission pattern (e.g., white) at least before and after the timing when the second starting sound, third starting sound, etc. is heard. This configuration makes it easier for players to sense the change in the step-up stage.

When the arrow hits the balloon (Figure 15(d)), it is determined that the performance step will end at its third stage, and at that timing (first timing), a high-brightness performance WO11 (first high-brightness performance) (Figure 15(e)) is performed, and during (or after) the high-brightness performance WO11, one of multiple (here, five) third-second-half performances ST3Ba-ST3Be is executed, here third-second-half performance ST3Bc (Figure 15(f)). In other words, the high-brightness performance WO11 is executed at the timing (first timing) when the first scene image for the first-half performance switches to the second scene image for the second-half performance.

Here, a high-brightness effect refers to an effect in which a high-brightness image 170 is displayed, thereby reducing the visibility of the image behind the high-brightness image 170 (here, the step-up preview effect image 169). All high-brightness effects in this embodiment are what is known as whiteout, and use a white high-brightness image 170, but the color of the high-brightness image may be any color other than white, such as gray, yellow, blue, red, etc., or may be composed of multiple colors. In addition, there may be cases in which no image is displayed behind the high-brightness image 170.

In the high-brightness effect WO11, the high-brightness image 170a is displayed in front of the step-up preview effect image (specific image) 169 and behind the mini symbol 165, the reserved base image 168, and the reserved images X1-X4, Y1-Y4 in front of them. This allows the visibility of the step-up preview effect image (specific image) 169 to be changed without changing the visibility of the reserved images X1-X4, Y1-Y4, or the mini symbol 165. This is also true for the other high-brightness effects described below. Note that in the high-brightness effect WO11, the same high-brightness image 170a is displayed regardless of which of the third second-half effects ST3Ba-ST3Be is selected. The same is true for the other first, second, fourth, and fifth second-half effects.

However, this is not a limitation. Alternatively, the high-brightness image 170 may be displayed in front of at least one of the mini-pattern 165, reserved images X1-, Y1-, and reserved base image 168, thereby reducing their visibility. In this case, the high-brightness image 170 may be displayed in front of the reserved base image 168 but behind the reserved images X1-, Y1-. This allows for a more impactful high-brightness effect over a wider area without reducing the visibility of at least the reserved images X1-, Y1-. Furthermore, it is desirable to configure the display area that does not overlap with the high-brightness image 170 to be smaller than the area in which the high-brightness image 170 is displayed. This allows for a stronger impression that the image behind is being obscured by the high-brightness image 170. Furthermore, it is desirable for the display area that does not overlap with the high-brightness image 170 to be an area that does not contain information suggesting reliability (text information, character images, or other images displayed in reliability colors) among the images of the third second half performance ST3B that will be displayed subsequently. This allows the concealing effect of the high-brightness image 170 to be achieved without concealing the entire area of the display screen with the high-brightness image 170.

The high-brightness image 170 is displayed in white within a predetermined area on the screen, and is set to an arbitrary transmittance within that area. The transmittance of the high-brightness image 170 may be uniform or non-uniform within the display area. When the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170 is non-uniform, the transmittance and/or the rate of change in transmittance of the high-brightness image 170 may be configured to be different between areas where information suggesting reliability (text information, character images, other images displayed in reliability colors) is located and other areas. In this case, it is desirable to configure the transmittance and/or the rate of change in transmittance to be lower in areas where information suggesting reliability (text information, character images, other images displayed in reliability colors) is located. Furthermore, the transmittance and/or the rate of change in transmittance may be lower in areas where particularly important text information or other images displayed in reliability colors among information suggesting reliability are located than in areas where character images are located, or vice versa. In this way, by varying the transmittance and rate of change of the high-brightness image depending on the display position, it is possible to prevent the high-brightness effect from becoming monotonous. Furthermore, the level of transmittance and rate of change of transmittance can help the viewer understand the display content of the image in the third second half effect ST3B, for example, making the high-brightness effect more complex and interesting.

The size (display range) of the high-brightness image can be changed over time, and the transmittance value and transmittance distribution can also be changed over time. If the transmittance of high-brightness image 170 is 0%, the image behind high-brightness image 170 will be completely invisible, and if the transmittance of high-brightness image 170 is 100%, the high-brightness image 170 itself will be completely invisible. Therefore, if the transmittance of a specific portion of high-brightness image 170 is 100%, it can be considered that this specific portion is not a part that constitutes high-brightness image 170 in the first place. Furthermore, if the transmittance of a specific portion of high-brightness image 170 changes from a value less than 100% to 100%, it can be considered that this specific portion falls outside the range of high-brightness image 170 when it reaches 100%.

During the high-brightness effect WO11 (Figure 15 (e)), the output of BGM1 related to the step-up preview effect continues. Also, during the high-brightness effect WO11, a predetermined emphasis sound is output as a sound effect, and this predetermined emphasis sound is selected from the first to fifth predetermined emphasis sounds depending on the reliability information regarding the jackpot in the second half effect (for example, in the case of the third second half effect, depending on which of ST3Ba to ST3Be is selected). That is, for example, if an image (first reliability specific image) relating to the third second half effect ST3Ba (FIG. 14(a1)) is displayed while the high-brightness image 170a is being displayed, a first predetermined emphasis sound corresponding to the image (first reliability specific image) relating to the third second half effect ST3Ba can be output (first sound effect) while the high-brightness image 170a is being displayed. Furthermore, if an image (second reliability specific image) relating to the third second half effect ST3Bc (FIG. 14(c1)) is displayed while the high-brightness image 170a is being displayed, a third predetermined emphasis sound corresponding to the image (second reliability specific image) relating to the third second half effect ST3Bc can be output (second sound effect) while the high-brightness image 170a is being displayed. This allows the reliability information to be notified to the player in advance by audio during the high-brightness effect WO11, when the dialogue string (text information) is still invisible or difficult to see, which has the advantage of improving the presentation effect.

Also, a common predetermined emphasis sound may be output for each jackpot reliability in the second half effects. For example, a common first predetermined emphasis sound may be output when displaying the image (Type A first reliability specific image) related to the third second half effect ST3Ba (FIG. 14(a1)), when displaying the image (Type B first reliability specific image) related to the third second half effect ST3Bb (FIG. 14(b1)), and when displaying the image (Type B first reliability specific image) related to the third second half effect ST3Bc (FIG. 14(c1)). A common second emphasis sound may be output when displaying the image (Type A first reliability specific image) related to the third second half effect ST3Bd (FIG. 14(d1)) and when displaying the image (Type B first reliability specific image) related to the third second half effect ST3Be (FIG. 14(e1)). This allows the player to be notified of the expected reliability information in advance based on the content of the predetermined emphasis sound, resulting in improved presentation effects.

The first to fifth predetermined emphasis sounds may be configured so that the higher the reliability of a jackpot is, based on reliability information related to a jackpot in the second half of the performance, the greater the output volume and/or output duration. In this case, the output volume and/or output duration of the third predetermined emphasis sound (first specific sound) output when the high-brightness effect WO11 is executed (first high-brightness effect) during the third second half of the performance ST3Bc (FIG. 14(c1)) will be greater than the first predetermined emphasis sound (second specific sound) output when the high-brightness effect WO11 is executed (second high-brightness effect) during the third second half of the performance ST3Ba (FIG. 14(a1)).

Furthermore, the first to fifth predetermined accent sounds may be configured to be accompanied by a vibration effect by activating the vibration means, the higher the reliability of a jackpot in the latter half of the performance, based on reliability information regarding a jackpot. For example, the first to third predetermined accent sounds may be configured not to be accompanied by a vibration effect, while the fourth and fifth predetermined accent sounds may be configured to be accompanied by a vibration effect. Alternatively, only the fifth predetermined accent sound may be configured to be accompanied by a vibration effect. Here, the vibration means may be configured to vibrate a predetermined part, such as the effect button 34. Furthermore, when two types of predetermined accent sounds, the first and second predetermined accent sounds, are used, only one of them, the second predetermined accent sound, may be configured to be accompanied by a vibration effect. Furthermore, a vibration effect does not necessarily have to be accompanied by a vibration effect; a vibration effect may or may not be performed when a predetermined accent sound is played. More preferably, a vibration effect is only performed when the likelihood of a jackpot is high.

Furthermore, during the high-brightness effect WO11 (first high-brightness effect), at least a portion of the effect lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) emit light in the first high-brightness medium light-emitting mode (the first light-emitting mode corresponding to the high-brightness effect) (first light-emitting effect in which the light-emitting means emits light in the first light-emitting mode, first light-emitting effect). In this embodiment, the first high-brightness medium light-emitting mode during the high-brightness effect WO11 is a cyclical change mode that cyclically changes between multiple colors (e.g., three colors: gold, green, and white) including the text color (e.g., gold) of the third second half effect ST3B. Note that the first high-brightness medium light-emitting mode only needs to include a color corresponding to the text color (e.g., gold) of the third second half effect ST3B, and may be a single color such as gold. This allows the reliability information to be notified to the player in advance by light emission during the high-brightness effect WO11, when the dialogue string (text information) is still not visible or difficult to see, which has the advantage of improving the effect of the effect. Furthermore, when the effect lamp L is illuminated in a color corresponding to an image, the color of the light does not have to be exactly the same as the color of the image, as long as it is a similar color (for example, yellow for a gold image).

During the third second half performance ST3Bc (Figure 15(f)) after the end of the high-brightness performance WO11, as described above, a step-up preview performance image 169 is displayed in which a large fox character image is displayed in a position that divides the background image into a left background image and a right background image, and a line of dialogue saying "Even better things are likely to happen" is displayed in gold in front of the character image (fox) and the background image, spanning them.

During this third-second half performance ST3Bc (Figure 15(f)), the output of BGM1 related to the step-up preview performance continues, and a predetermined third-second half voice is output as a line sound. This third-second half voice corresponds to the line string (text information) displayed on the screen, and in this case, "It seems like something even better is going to happen." When this line sound is output, it is desirable to have the character image perform what is known as lip-syncing (speaking).

Furthermore, during the third second half effect ST3Bc (Figure 15(f)), at least some of the effect lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) emit light in a second half light-emitting mode (a third light-emitting mode corresponding to a specific image) corresponding to the third second half effect ST3Bc, for example, in a cyclical change mode that cycles through multiple colors (here, three colors: gold, green, and white) including the text color (here, gold) of the third second half effect ST3Bc. As such, the second half light-emitting mode may be the same as or different from the preceding first high-brightness medium light-emitting mode, but it is preferable to configure it to include the text color (here, gold) of the third second half effect ST3Bc. This allows for light-emitting effects in a light-emitting mode corresponding to the text color (here, gold) indicating the probability of a jackpot even after the image effect of the third second half effect ST3Bc has finished displaying. This makes it possible to notify players who missed the image effect using the text color (here, gold) indicating the probability of a jackpot whenever possible. Furthermore, it is desirable that the light color of this second half light-emitting mode does not include colors corresponding to other second half effects (here, blue, red, danger colors, rainbow colors). The second half light-emitting mode may also be configured with only the light color corresponding to the text color (for example, gold). It may also be configured not to include the text color of the third second half effect ST3Bc (here, gold), which makes it possible to visually sense that the performance period of the third second half effect ST3Bc has ended.

After the third second half performance ST3Bc is executed, the high-brightness performance WO12 (the second high-brightness performance) is executed at that timing (second timing) (Figure 15(g)). During the execution of the high-brightness performance WO12, the step-up preview performance image 169 related to the third second half performance ST3Bc is switched to a variable screen of the decorative pattern 164 (specific image end performance) (Figure 15(h)). Here, the high-brightness performance WO12 differs from the high-brightness performance WO11 in the display area of the high-brightness image and the rate of change in transmittance. This makes it possible to clearly express the start and end of the second half performance. While the high-brightness performance WO12 and the high-brightness performance WO11 have the same minimum transmittance value (0%) for the high-brightness image, this may also be different. The high-brightness performance WO12 may also have the same display area for the high-brightness image as the high-brightness performance WO11. The transmittance (minimum value) and/or the rate of change of transmittance may also be the same. This makes it possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the second half of the performance may still continue. Furthermore, it is desirable that the high-brightness performance WO12 be displayed so that at least the area where information suggesting the reliability of the second half of the performance (text information, character images, other images displayed in reliability colors) is located is concealed by a high-brightness image. This makes it possible to end the second half of the performance without creating a sense of incongruity and transition to the pattern variation screen. Furthermore, the high-brightness image may be configured to conceal at least the area where any one of the information suggesting the reliability of the second half of the performance (text information, character images, other images displayed in reliability colors) is located.

During the high-brightness effect WO12 (Figure 15 (g)), for example, the output of background music is stopped. Also, during the high-brightness effect WO12, a specific emphasis sound is output as a sound effect, and this specific emphasis sound is selected from the first to fifth specific emphasis sounds depending on the reliability information regarding the jackpot in the second half effect (for example, depending on which of ST3Ba to ST3Be is selected in the case of the third second half effect). Also, during the high-brightness effect WO12, a common specific emphasis sound may be output as a sound effect. In other words, a common specific emphasis sound may be output regardless of the content of the reliability information regarding the jackpot in the second half effect. This allows, for example, during high-brightness effect WO11, a different predetermined emphasis sound is output depending on the reliability information regarding the jackpot in the latter half of the effect, while during high-brightness effect WO12, a common specific emphasis sound can be output regardless of the reliability information regarding the jackpot, making it possible to express different effect effects in high-brightness effect WO11 and high-brightness effect WO12. Alternatively, the predetermined emphasis sound during high-brightness effect WO11 may be common regardless of the reliability information regarding the jackpot, while the specific emphasis sound during high-brightness effect WO12 may be configured to differ depending on the reliability information regarding the jackpot.

The first through fifth specific emphasis sounds may be configured to have a higher output volume and/or output duration based on the reliability information regarding a jackpot in the second half of the performance, and the higher the reliability of the jackpot. In this case, the third specific emphasis sound (first specific sound) output when the high-brightness effect WO12 is executed during the third second half of the performance ST3Bc (FIG. 14(c1)) (first high-brightness effect B) will have a higher output volume and/or output duration than the first specific emphasis sound (second specific sound) output when the high-brightness effect WO12 is executed during the third second half of the performance ST3Ba (FIG. 14(a1)) (second high-brightness effect B). Furthermore, the first through fifth specific emphasis sounds in the high-brightness effect WO12 may be different from or the same as the first through fifth specific emphasis sounds in the high-brightness effect WO11.

Furthermore, during the high-brightness effect WO12 (second high-brightness effect), at least some of the effect lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) emit light in a second high-brightness medium light-emitting mode (second light-emitting mode), for example, in a cyclical change mode that cyclically changes between multiple colors (here, three colors: gold, green, and white) including the text color of the third second-half effect ST3Bc (here, gold) (a specific light-emitting effect in which the light-emitting means emits light in a specific light-emitting mode corresponding to a specific image). In this way, the second-half light-emitting mode may be the same as or different from the first high-brightness medium light-emitting mode and the second-half light-emitting mode, but it is preferable to configure it to include the text color of the third second-half effect ST3Bc (here, gold). Alternatively, the second-half light-emitting mode may be configured not to include the text color (here, gold). Furthermore, by configuring the first high-brightness medium light-emitting mode to include the text color and the second-half light-emitting mode not to include the text color, it is possible to avoid monotony in the presentation and prevent a decrease in the presentation effect.

When the pattern changing screen starts after the high-brightness effect WO12, a pattern stopping sound is output as a sound effect in time with the stopping of decorative patterns 164a-164c.

Next, we will explain in more detail the effect period centered on the high-brightness effects WO11 and WO12 for the step-up preview effect shown in Figure 15. Figures 16 to 18 show the changes in the display screen and light-emitting means at even shorter time intervals than Figure 15 for the period from Figure 15(e) to (h), i.e., the period from the start of high-brightness effect WO11 to the end of high-brightness effect WO12 and the transition to the changing screen of decorative pattern 164. Note that the 22 frames of display images shown in Figures 16 to 18 do not represent all frames from the period from Figure 15(e) to (h), but are extracted at a regular interval from all of those frames. Therefore, in Figures 16 to 18, the time interval between adjacent frames is the same (here, A milliseconds). As such, in Figures 15 to 18, if the number of frames doubles, the time also doubles. For example, the elapsed time between Figures 15(a) to (c) is the same as between Figures 15(d) to (f), but the elapsed time between Figures 15(a) to (c) and Figures 15(d) to (g) is longer than the former.

First, we will explain the details of the high-brightness effect WO11. In the high-brightness effect WO11 shown in Figures 16(a) to 17(j), at the start, a high-brightness image 170a is displayed in front of the step-up preview effect image (specific image) 169 and behind the mini-pattern 165, reserved base image 168, and the reserved images X1 to X4 and Y1 to Y4 in front of them (Figure 16(a)) (high-brightness image display processing), and the size (range) and transmittance of the high-brightness image 170a gradually change until it finally disappears (Figure 17(j)).

Furthermore, the size (range) of the high-brightness image 170a is configured to be maximum at the start of display (Figure 16(a)) and gradually decrease over time. In other words, the high-brightness effect WO11 is composed of an expansion change effect that changes the size (range) of the high-brightness image 170a in an expansion direction, and a contraction change effect that changes the size (range) of the high-brightness image 170a in a contraction direction, with the latter (Figures 16(a) to 17(j)) taking longer to execute than the former (Figure 16(a)). Note that in the high-brightness effect WO11, the coverage rate of the high-brightness image 170a relative to the entire step-up preview effect image 169 is less than 100%, and even when the size (range) of the high-brightness image 170a is maximum (Figure 16(a)), a portion of the step-up preview effect image 169 is visible from the front. Of course, when the size (range) of the high-brightness image 170a is at its maximum, the coverage rate of the high-brightness image 170a with respect to the entire step-up preview performance image 169 may be 100%. Also, it is sufficient that part of the predetermined information (text information, character image, reliability color display image, etc.) in the step-up preview performance image is concealed by the high-brightness image 170a, making it difficult to perceive and/or see; it is not necessary for all of the predetermined information to be concealed.

The high-brightness image 170a is set so that its transmittance is approximately uniform within its range. The high-brightness image 170a changes not only in size (range) but also in transmittance over time (transmittance change processing, transmittance change effect), with transmittance at a minimum (e.g., 0%) at the start of display (Figure 16(a)) and gradually increasing (rising) at a constant rate over time. In other words, the high-brightness effect WO11 is composed of a low-transmittance change effect that decreases the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170a, and a high-transmittance change effect that increases the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170a, with the latter (Figures 16(a) to 17(j)) taking longer to execute than the former (Figure 16(a)).

The minimum transmittance of the high-brightness image 170a may be greater than 0%. The rate of change (amount of change per unit time) of the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170a need not be constant. The transmittance of the high-brightness image 170a may be non-uniform, and this non-uniform transmittance may be changed over time. The size (range) of the high-brightness image 170a may be changed without changing its transmittance, or the transmittance may be changed without changing the size (range) of the high-brightness image 170a. However, a reduction in the size (range) of the high-brightness image 170a means that the transmittance of a portion of the high-brightness image 170a increases to 100%, and that portion can be considered to have essentially disappeared. Therefore, changing the size (range) of the high-brightness image 170a can be said to essentially change the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170a.

Furthermore, in the high-brightness effect WO11, the step-up preview effect image 169 displayed behind the high-brightness image 170a is switched, for example, when the high-brightness image 170a starts to be displayed (FIG. 16(a)), from the previous image of the third first half effect ST3A (see FIG. 15(d)) to the image of the third second half effect ST3Bc (see FIG. 14(c1)). As a result, after the start of the high-brightness effect WO11, the size (range) of the high-brightness image 170a gradually decreases, and as the transmittance similarly gradually increases, the visibility of the step-up preview effect image 169 improves, and when the high-brightness image 170a eventually disappears (FIG. 17(j)), the entire step-up preview effect image 169 (excluding the portion hidden behind the mini-pattern 165, etc.) becomes completely visible.

During the high-brightness effect WO11, the effect lamp L emits light in a first high-brightness medium light-emitting mode. The first high-brightness medium light-emitting mode is a cyclical change mode that cycles through multiple colors (e.g., three colors: gold, green, and white), including the text color (e.g., gold) of the third second half effect ST3Bc. For example, the light color changes in the order of green (Figures 16(a)-(c)), white (Figures 16(d)-(f)), and gold (Figures 16(g)-(i)), so that gold light corresponding to the text color appears in the second half or final part of the high-brightness effect WO11. However, this is not limited to this. The light-emitting mode of the effect lamp L, for example, brightness and/or light color, may be changed in response to changes in the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170a. This allows for a better correlation between changes in the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170a and changes in the light-emitting mode, enhancing the effect of the effect. Additionally, the light emission mode (e.g., brightness and light color) of the effect lamp L may be configured to change in stages according to changes in the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170a. For example, when the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170a is between 0% and 30%, a first light emission mode is used, when it is between 31% and 70%, a second light emission mode is used, and when it is between 71% and 99%, a third light emission mode is used.

As described above, during high-brightness effect WO11, the visibility of the step-up preview effect image 169 behind the high-brightness image 170a changes over time due to changes in the size (range) and/or transmittance, and the text information constituting the step-up preview effect image 169 transitions from an invisible (or difficult to see) state to a visible (or easily visible) state at a predetermined point in time (e.g., Figure 16(d)). That is, during high-brightness effect WO11, a first transmittance change process can be executed that changes the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170a while making the text information invisible (or difficult to see), and a second transmittance change process can be executed that changes the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170a while making all of the text information visible (or easily visible). The execution times for the former (e.g., Figures 16(a)-(d)) and the latter (e.g., Figures 16(d)-17(j)) differ, with the latter taking longer than the former. In this way, by making the execution time of the latter longer than the former, the text information that interests the player most can be disclosed to the player early on, and the high-brightness image can be displayed for a sufficient period of time, enhancing the effect of the high-brightness effect itself.

The execution time of the first transmittance change process may be longer than that of the second transmittance change process, or the execution times of the former and the latter may be approximately the same. By executing the first transmittance change process for a longer time than the second transmittance change process, the disclosure of the text information can be delayed, thereby building up the player's sense of anticipation and tension. Furthermore, once the text information has been revealed, it is desirable to disclose the entire information as soon as possible (increasing visibility to make the text information easier to see as soon as possible), so if the execution time of the first transmittance change process is set long, it is desirable to execute the second transmittance change process for a shorter time.

The boundary between the state in which text information is invisible (or difficult to see) and the state in which it is visible (or easily visible) may be defined as the moment when at least a portion of the text information no longer overlaps with the high-brightness image. Also, the moment when all (the entire) text information no longer overlaps with the high-brightness image may be defined as the moment when the text information is visible (or easily visible).

Furthermore, during the high-brightness effect WO11, it is possible to execute a first range change process that changes the size (range) of the high-brightness image 170a while making the text information invisible (or difficult to see), and a second range change process that changes the size (range) of the high-brightness image 170a while making all of the text information visible (or easy to see). The execution times for the former (e.g., Figures 16(a) to (d)) and the latter (e.g., Figures 16(d) to 17(j)) are different, with the latter taking longer than the former. Note that the execution time for the first range change process may be longer than that of the second range change process, or the execution times for the former and latter may be approximately the same.

When the high-brightness effect WO11 ends and the entire step-up preview effect image 169 for the third-second half effect ST3Bc becomes visible (Figure 17(j)), the line (third-second half voice) "Even better things could happen" corresponding to the line string (text information) displayed on the screen is output. The following dynamic display is performed on the step-up preview effect image 169 in response to the output of the line (post-execution dynamic display processing, post-execution change processing). That is, as shown in Figures 17(j) to (o), while the line (third-second half voice) is being output, the fox character image lip-syncs in time with the line, and the line string performs a predetermined movement (here, each character swings). Additionally, the display color of the characters corresponding to the line being output temporarily changes (e.g., from gold to white). As a result, the white portion is perceived as moving, for example, from left to right, on the gold-colored string "Even better things could happen." Note that dialogue may be output without the character lip-syncing.

After the post-execution dynamic display processing (FIGS. 17(j)-(o)) in the third second half performance ST3Bc ends, the high-brightness performance WO12 begins. In the high-brightness performance WO12 shown in FIG. 17(o)-FIG. 18(v), similar to the high-brightness performance WO11, a high-brightness image 170b appears before the step-up preview performance image 169 and behind the mini-pattern 165, reserved base image 168, and the reserved images X1-X4 and Y1-Y4 in front of them, and then disappears. However, the display pattern of the high-brightness image 170b in this high-brightness performance WO12 (second high-brightness performance) is different from the display pattern of the high-brightness image 170a in the high-brightness performance WO11 (first high-brightness performance), and the duration of their execution is also different. As with high-brightness effect WO11 (first high-brightness effect), high-brightness effect WO12 (second high-brightness effect) may also be configured to transition to a pattern-changing screen by displaying a high-brightness image with low transmittance (e.g., 0%) for a short period of time, and then increasing the transmittance of the high-brightness image over a longer period of time.

That is, the high-brightness image 170b is configured so that its size (range) gradually increases over time, reaching a maximum at a predetermined point (Figures 17(o) to 18(s)), and then gradually decreases over time until it finally disappears (Figures 18(s) to (v)). In this way, the high-brightness effect WO12 is composed of an expansion change effect that changes the size (range) of the high-brightness image 170b in an expansion direction, and a contraction change effect that changes the size (range) of the high-brightness image 170b in a contraction direction, with the execution time of the latter (Figures 18(s) to 18(v)) being shorter than that of the former (Figures 17(o) to 18(s)). Note that in the high-brightness effect WO12, the coverage rate of the high-brightness image 170b relative to the entire step-up preview effect image 169 is less than 100%, and even when the size (range) of the high-brightness image 170b is at its maximum (Figure 18(s)), a portion of the step-up preview effect image 169 is outside the range of the high-brightness image 170b. Of course, when the size (range) of the high-brightness image 170b is at its maximum, the coverage rate of the high-brightness image 170 relative to the entire step-up preview performance image 169 may be 100%.

The high-brightness effect WO12 (second high-brightness effect) and the high-brightness effect WO11 (first high-brightness effect) may be configured to have different coverage rates of high-brightness images relative to the entire step-up preview effect image. In this case, it is desirable that at least the information suggesting reliability (text information, character information, and displays suggesting reliability colors) be covered by high-brightness images in both the high-brightness effect WO12 (second high-brightness effect) and the high-brightness effect WO11 (first high-brightness effect). Furthermore, since the information suggesting reliability has already been disclosed at the time high-brightness effect WO12 (second high-brightness effect) is executed, there may be areas/ranges where this information is not hidden by the high-brightness images.

The high-brightness image 170b is configured to have a substantially uniform transmittance within its range. The high-brightness image 170b is configured to change not only its size (range) but also its transmittance (transmittance change processing, transmittance change effect), so that the transmittance gradually decreases over time, for example, at a constant rate of change, reaching a minimum (here, 0%) at a predetermined point (Figures 17(o) to 18(s)), and then gradually increases over time, for example, at a constant rate of change (Figures 18(s) to 18(v)). In other words, the high-brightness effect WO12 is composed of a low-transmittance change effect that decreases the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170b, and a high-transmittance change effect that increases the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170b, with the latter (Figures 18(s) to 18(v)) having a shorter execution time than the former (Figures 17(o) to 18(s)). Note that the minimum transmittance of the high-brightness image 170b is set to 0% (Figure 18(s)), but it may be greater than 0%. Of course, the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170b may be non-uniform, and this non-uniform transmittance may be configured to change over time. Furthermore, the execution time of the high-transmittance change effect may be longer than that of the low-transmittance change effect, or the execution times of both may be approximately the same.

Furthermore, the size (range) of high-brightness image 170b may be changed without changing its transmittance, or the transmittance may be changed without changing the size (range) of high-brightness image 170b. However, a decrease in the size (range) of high-brightness image 170b means that the transmittance of a portion of high-brightness image 170b increases to 100%, which can be considered to have essentially disappeared. Therefore, changing the size (range) of high-brightness image 170b can be said to essentially change the transmittance of high-brightness image 170b.

Furthermore, in the high-brightness effect WO12, the step-up preview effect image 169 displayed behind the high-brightness image 170b is switched to the variable screen of the decorative pattern 164 (see FIG. 15(h)), for example, when the size (range) of the high-brightness image 170b reaches its maximum and its transmittance reaches its minimum (FIG. 18(s)), or at a timing close to that time. As a result, after the start of the high-brightness effect WO12, the size (range) of the high-brightness image 170b gradually increases, and as the transmittance similarly gradually decreases, the visibility of the step-up preview effect image 169 related to the third latter half effect ST3B decreases, and the screen is switched to the variable screen of the decorative pattern 164 at the point when the visibility of the step-up preview effect image 169 is at its lowest (FIG. 18(s)), or at a timing close to that time. Then, as the size (range) of the high-brightness image 170b gradually decreases and the transmittance similarly gradually increases, the visibility of the varying screen of the decorative pattern 164 improves, and when the high-brightness image 170b eventually disappears (Figure 18(v)), the entire varying screen of the decorative pattern 164 (excluding the parts hidden behind the mini-patterns 165, etc.) becomes completely visible. In this way, during the execution of the high-brightness effect WO12, a specific image end effect is executed, which ends the display of the step-up preview effect image (specific image) 169.

Note that during the third second half of the performance ST3Bc (during post-execution dynamic display processing) after the high-brightness performance WO11 ends, the performance lamp L emits light in the second half of the performance mode, and during the subsequent high-brightness performance WO12, the performance lamp L emits light in the second high-brightness medium performance mode. In this embodiment, both the second half of the performance mode and the second high-brightness medium performance mode are common to the first high-brightness medium performance mode, and are cyclically changing modes that cyclically change among multiple colors (e.g., three colors: gold, green, and white) including the text color of the third second half of the performance ST3Bc (e.g., gold), with the light color changing in the following order: green (Figures 17(j)-(l)), white (Figures 17(m)-(o)), gold (Figures 17(p)-(r)), and green (Figures 18(s)-(u)). Note that at least one of the second half of the performance mode and the second high-brightness medium performance mode may be different from the first high-brightness medium performance mode. However, even in this case, it is desirable that all light emission modes include a color that corresponds to the character color (e.g., gold).

As described above, the step-up preview effect comprises a first half effect before the display of a step-up preview effect image 169 (specific image) containing reliability information related to a jackpot (i.e., text information whose display color and content differ depending on the reliability of a jackpot), and a second half effect in which the step-up preview effect image 169 (specific image) containing the reliability information related to that jackpot is displayed. After the first half effect is executed, a high-brightness effect WO11 is executed in front of the specific image before or at the start of the second half effect. Furthermore, the effect lamp (light-emitting means) L emits light in a first half light-emitting mode (first light-emitting mode) corresponding to this first half effect during the first half effect, and emits light in a first high-brightness medium light-emitting mode (second light-emitting mode) corresponding to this high-brightness effect WO11 during the high-brightness effect WO11.

Furthermore, in the high-brightness effects WO11 and WO12 of the step-up preview effect, the high-brightness images 170a and 170b are displayed in front of the step-up preview effect image 169 (specific image) and behind the first and second reserved images (reserved images) X1-, Y1- and mini pattern 165, thereby changing the visibility of the step-up preview effect image 169 while not changing the visibility of the first and second reserved images X1-, Y1- and mini pattern 165. The high-brightness effect WO11 is composed of a low-transmittance change effect that decreases the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170a and a high-transmittance change effect that increases the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170a, with the latter (Figures 16(a) to 17(j)) having a longer execution time than the former (Figure 16(a)). On the other hand, in the high-brightness effect WO12, the execution time for the high-transmittance change effect (Fig. 18(s) to Fig. 18(v)) is shorter than that for the low-transmittance change effect (Fig. 17(o) to Fig. 18(s)).

In addition, the high-brightness effect WO11 of the step-up preview effect can execute a high-brightness image display process (Figure 16(a)) that displays a high-brightness image 170a, and a transmittance change process (Figures 16(a) to 17(j)) that changes the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170a displayed by the high-brightness image display process.By increasing the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170a by the transmittance change process, the visibility of the step-up preview effect image 169 behind it is gradually improved. Furthermore, the step-up preview effect image 169 includes a text image (specific text information) having reliability information, and during the high-brightness effect WO11, it is possible to execute a first transmittance change process that changes the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170a while making the text information invisible (or difficult to see), and a second transmittance change process that changes the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170a while making all of the text information visible (or easy to see). The execution times for the former (e.g., Figures 16(a) to (d)) and the latter (e.g., Figures 16(d) to 17(j)) are different, with the latter taking longer than the former.

In addition, in the step-up preview performance, it is possible to display any of several types of specific images, including the step-up preview performance image (A-1 reliability specific image having A-1 reliability information corresponding to A-1 reliability) displayed in the third latter half performance ST3Ba (Figure 14 (a1)) and the step-up preview performance image (A-2 reliability specific image having A-2 reliability information corresponding to A-2 reliability higher than A-1 reliability) displayed in the third latter half performance ST3Bc (Figure 14 (c1)), and the high-brightness image 170 in the high-brightness performance WO11 While the third second half performance ST3Ba and the third second half performance ST3Bb are displayed, the high-brightness image 170a is the same, and in the case of the third second half performance ST3Ba, a first predetermined emphasis sound corresponding to the image related to the third second half performance ST3Ba (first reliability specific image) can be output (first sound effect) while the high-brightness image 170a is displayed, and in the case of the third second half performance ST3Bc, a third predetermined emphasis sound corresponding to the image related to the third second half performance ST3Bc (second reliability specific image) can be output (second sound effect) while the high-brightness image 170a is displayed.

In addition, during the execution of the high-brightness effect WO12, in the step-up preview effect, the step-up preview effect image 169 relating to the third latter half effect ST3Bc is switched to a variable screen of the decorative pattern 164, thereby enabling the execution of a specific image ending effect that ends the display of the step-up preview effect image 169 including the text image. Furthermore, when the specific image ending effect is executed during the execution of the high-brightness effect WO12, the effect lamp (light-emitting means) L emits light in a second high-brightness medium light-emitting mode (specific light-emitting mode corresponding to the specific image) including the text color of the latter half effect (specific light-emitting mode).

In addition, in the step-up preview effect, a step-up preview effect image (specific image) 169 containing reliability information regarding a jackpot is displayed during the execution of high-brightness effect WO11 (first high-brightness effect), and then its display ends during the execution of high-brightness effect WO12 (second high-brightness effect) (effect at the end of the specific image). The execution times of high-brightness effect WO11 and high-brightness effect WO12 differ, and in the examples of Figures 16 to 18, high-brightness effect WO11 has a longer execution time than high-brightness effect WO12.

In addition, in the step-up preview effect, a step-up preview effect image 169 containing jackpot reliability information is displayed while the high-brightness effect WO11 is being executed, and after the high-brightness effect WO11 ends, a post-execution dynamic display process is executed to dynamically display at least a portion of the step-up preview effect image 169, and a post-execution change process (Figures 17(j) to (o)) is executed to perform a predetermined change (color change) on at least a portion of the step-up preview effect image 169.

In addition, the step-up preview performance can execute a high-brightness performance (A-1 high-brightness performance) WO11 that displays a high-brightness image (A-1 high-brightness image) 170a, and a high-brightness performance (A-2 high-brightness performance) WO12 that displays a high-brightness image (A-2 high-brightness image) 170b. The high-brightness performance (A-1 high-brightness performance) WO11 is executed at the first timing when the first scene image for the first half performance switches to the second scene image for the second half performance, and the high-brightness performance (A-2 high-brightness performance) WO12 is executed at the second timing thereafter.

In addition, in the step-up preview effect, during the high-brightness effect WO11, a text image containing jackpot reliability information begins to be displayed, and when the display of the text image ends, a high-brightness effect WO12 (specific image end effect) can be executed. During the high-brightness effect WO11, a first light-emitting effect is executed in which the effect lamp (light-emitting means) L is illuminated in a first high-brightness medium light-emitting mode (first light-emitting mode) that corresponds to the reliability information (e.g., display color) in the text image, and during the high-brightness effect WO12 (specific image end effect), a second light-emitting effect is executed in which the effect lamp (light-emitting means) L is illuminated in a second high-brightness medium light-emitting mode (second light-emitting mode). The second high-brightness medium light-emitting mode (second light-emitting mode) may be different from the first high-brightness medium light-emitting mode (first light-emitting mode).

Furthermore, in the step-up preview performance, the third predetermined emphasis sound (first specific sound B) output when the high-brightness performance WO11 is executed (first high-brightness performance B) during the third second half performance ST3Bc (Figure 14 (c1)) has a higher output volume and/or output duration than the first predetermined emphasis sound (second specific sound B) output when the high-brightness performance WO11 is executed (second high-brightness performance B) during the third second half performance ST3Ba (Figure 14 (a1)). A vibration effect may be executed approximately simultaneously with the third predetermined emphasis sound. Alternatively, a vibration effect may be executed in place of the third predetermined emphasis sound.

The step-up preview effect is an example of a text information display effect that displays text information, and can execute a high-brightness effect WO11 as a text information display start effect (first specific effect) that is executed when the text information display starts, and a high-brightness effect WO12 as a text information display end effect (second specific effect) that is executed when the text information display ends.After the high-brightness effect WO11 (text information display start effect) is executed, a display mode change process (specific display process that displays text information in a specific display mode) (Figures 17 (j) to (o)) is executed to change the display mode of the text information, and the display mode change process (specific display process) is not executed while the high-brightness effect WO12 (text information display end effect) is being executed.

In the above step-up preview performances, the number of variations in reliability display that can be implemented in the first to fifth second half performances ST1B to ST5B is uniformly set to five (Figure 14). However, the number of variations in reliability suggestion that can be implemented in the first to fifth second half performances ST1B to ST5B that are executed thereafter may be varied depending on the content of the first to fifth first half performances ST1A to ST5A. Specifically, in the first to third second half performances ST1B to ST3B, three types of reliability suggestion may be implemented, starting with the lowest reliability, and in the fourth and fifth second half performances ST4B to ST5B, five types of reliability suggestion may be implemented. Furthermore, in the fourth and fifth second half performances ST4B to ST5B, reliability suggestions (two types with high reliability) that are not implemented in the first to third second half performances ST1B to ST3B may be implemented. Additionally, the number of variations in reliability suggestions that can be implemented may vary depending on the character and stage, such as three types for the first second half performance ST1B, three types for the second second half performance ST2B, three types for the third second half performance ST3B, five types for the fourth second half performance ST4B, and four types for the fifth second half performance ST5B.

Also, depending on the selection rate of each character, the number of reliability suggestion variations may be increased for characters with high selection rates and decreased for characters with low selection rates. By configuring in this way, it is possible to show the player more presentation variations and create a presentation configuration that will not bore the player. Also, the number of reliability suggestion variations may be increased for characters with low selection rates than for characters with high selection rates. Furthermore, if the order of selection rates is set to elephant, lion, fox, squirrel, and bear, the number of reliability suggestion variations may be increased for foxes and squirrels rather than elephants and lions. Furthermore, in this case, the number of reliability suggestion variations for bears may be decreased compared to foxes and squirrels. In this case, it is desirable to configure the reliability suggestion variations that are executed when a bear is selected so that only high reliability ones are available, and no low reliability ones are available.

The various configurations in the step-up preview performance described above are not limited to this step-up preview performance, but can also be used in various other performances (preview performances and partial performances). For example, the various configurations of the high-brightness performances WO11 and WO12 in the step-up preview performance may also be used in the reach preview performances, dialogue preview performances, etc., described below.

[Reach notice effect]
19 to 23 show an example of a reach notice effect executed during normal fluctuation in a reach fluctuation pattern or a normal fluctuation pattern. This reach notice effect (specific notice effect) provides a notice regarding the establishment of a reach state and is composed of a reach notice first half effect RC1 and a reach notice second half effect RC2. The effect mode of the reach notice second half effect RC2 is set to be selected from multiple types (four types shown in FIG. 19 here) depending on the type of fluctuation pattern selected. The jackpot reliability is set to gradually increase from the first effect mode RC2a (FIG. 19(a)) to the fourth effect mode RC2d (FIG. 19(d)). In this way, for example, the effect image according to the first effect mode RC2a (FIG. 19(a)) is an example of a B-1 reliability specific image corresponding to the B-1 reliability, and the effect image according to the second effect mode RC2b (FIG. 19(b)) is an example of a B-2 reliability specific image corresponding to the B-2 reliability.

The multiple (four) presentation modes RC2a to RC2d of this reach preview second half presentation RC2 share roughly the same characters and actions that appear in the presentation images, but differ in the dialogue strings displayed in front of the character images, the corresponding voiced dialogue, and the base color of the presentation images. That is, as shown in Figure 19, the first to fourth presentation modes RC2a to RC2d all display the same kappa character image, but the dialogue strings displayed in front of the character image and the corresponding voiced dialogue are different for all four types, and are respectively "It's a reach!", "It's a SP reach!", "Big chance!!", and "Super hot!!".

The display colors of the dialogue text and the base colors of the effect images are also different for all four types. The display colors (internal colors) and base colors of the dialogue text corresponding to the first through fourth effect modes RC2a through RC2d are "blue," "red," "gold," and "danger," respectively. The danger colors are as described above. Thus, the first through fourth effect modes RC2a through RC2d have different jackpot reliability depending on the text display color, etc., so it can be said that the text image (specific text information) or the reach preview effect image containing that text image contains reliability information regarding a jackpot. It is also possible to provide multiple display modes (here, display colors) for a common text string. In cases where the text string itself indicates reliability, such as "super hot," it is desirable to enable the effect to be expressed using multiple display modes (display colors) with different reliability levels. For example, the danger-colored "super hot" could be configured to indicate a higher reliability than the gold-colored "super hot." In this case, multiple display modes other than display color (character color), such as different sizes of character outlines, may also be provided.

Next, a specific example of the reach preview effect will be described using an example in which the first effect mode RC2a (Figure 19(a)) of the first to fourth effect modes RC2a to RC2d is selected. First, an overview will be provided with reference to Figure 20. When the reach preview effect begins during normal fluctuation in the reach fluctuation pattern, BGM2 related to this reach preview effect begins to be output from speakers 18, 25 as background music. At the same time, the decorative pattern 164, which is rapidly fluctuating, disappears from the display screen 58a, and the reserved base image 168 is displayed at the bottom and the mini pattern 165 is displayed at the top, with a reach preview effect image 171 related to the reach preview first half effect RC1 displayed behind them (Figure 20(a)). This reach preview effect image 171 related to the reach preview first half effect RC1 consists of a scene in which a kappa character is flying through the sky.

Furthermore, during this reach notice first half performance RC1 (Figure 20(a)), at least some of the performance lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) will emit light in the first half light-emitting pattern corresponding to the reach notice first half performance, for example, orange. At the start of the reach notice performance, a predetermined starting sound may be output as a sound effect.

Then, the game transitions from the first half of the reach preview performance RC1 to the second half of the reach preview performance RC2 (here, the first performance mode RC2a), and the reach preview performance image 171 switches to a scene showing a close-up of the kappa character's upper body (Figure 20(b)~). Furthermore, during the scene change accompanying the transition from the first half of the reach preview performance RC1 to the second half of the reach preview performance RC2 (the switch from the first scene image to the second scene image) (first timing), a high-brightness performance (first high-brightness performance) WO21 is executed, which displays a high-brightness image 170c to reduce the visibility of the image behind the high-brightness image 170c (here, the reach preview performance image 171) (Figure 20(b)). Thus, at the first timing when the high-brightness performance WO21 is executed, the dialogue string (character image) containing reliability information regarding a jackpot is not yet displayed on the screen. In this high-brightness effect WO21, the minimum transmittance of the high-brightness image is greater than 0%, but it may also be configured so that the minimum transmittance of the high-brightness image is 0%, making the character image behind it completely invisible.

During the high-brightness effect WO21 (Figure 20 (b)), the output of BGM2 related to the reach notice effect continues. In addition, at the start of the high-brightness effect WO21, a predetermined first emphasis sound is output as a sound effect. In addition, during the high-brightness effect WO21, at least a portion of the effect lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) emit light in a high-brightness medium light-emitting mode. This high-brightness medium light-emitting mode includes a specific color (e.g., blue) that corresponds to the text color of the reach notice second half effect RC2, and is configured to change, for example, from a specific color (here, white) to the specific color (here, blue). Note that this high-brightness medium light-emitting mode may also be configured not to include the specific color that corresponds to the text color. This makes it possible to prevent the content of the text information to be displayed subsequently from being revealed in advance.

When the high-brightness effect WO21 ends and the reach preview effect image 171 becomes fully visible (Figure 20 (c)), the dialogue string (text information) "It's reach!" begins to be displayed in front of the character image (text information display start effect). At this time, the dialogue string appears accompanied by a first dynamic display effect (Figure 20 (c) -> (d)). That is, during the first dynamic display period in which the first dynamic display effect is executed, a text information display start effect (first specific effect) is executed when the display of text information begins. In this first dynamic display effect, the dialogue string moves (here, a movement involving rotation) at a first change speed toward a predetermined display position.

During the text information display start effect, the output of BGM 2 related to the reach preview effect continues. Furthermore, when the dialogue string begins to be displayed (when the text information display start effect begins), a predetermined character appearance sound is output as a sound effect. Furthermore, during the text information display start effect, at least a portion of the effect lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) emit light in a character appearance light-emitting mode. This character appearance light-emitting mode is a cyclical change mode that cycles through multiple colors (e.g., blue and white) including the text color of the dialogue string displayed on the screen (here, blue). It is preferable that the light-emitting color used in this cyclical change mode not be a color that indicates higher reliability than the text color of the dialogue string (here, blue) (here, red, gold, etc.). In this case, it is preferable to use a color that indicates lower reliability than the text color of the dialogue string, or a light-emitting color that is not used to indicate reliability (here, white, etc.). Furthermore, a light-emitting mode that corresponds only to the text color of the dialogue string may be adopted, or a light-emitting mode other than continuous lighting, such as flashing, may be used. Alternatively, only certain light-emitting locations may be configured to emit a light color corresponding to the character color of the dialogue string, while other light-emitting locations may emit light in other light modes (for example, white or off). In this case, for other light-emitting modes, it is desirable not to use a color (here, red, gold, etc.) that indicates higher reliability than the light-emitting color corresponding to the character color of the dialogue string (here, blue), and it is desirable to use a color that indicates lower reliability than the character color of the dialogue string, or a light color not used to indicate reliability (here, white, etc.).

When the dialogue string is displayed at the specified display position after the first dynamic display effect (second timing), a high-brightness effect (A-2 high-brightness effect) WO22 is executed, which displays a high-brightness image 170d to reduce the visibility of the image behind the high-brightness image 170d (here, the reach preview effect image 171) (Figure 20(d)). Thus, at the second timing when the high-brightness effect WO22 is executed, the dialogue string (text image) containing reliability information regarding a jackpot is already displayed on the screen. During this high-brightness effect WO22, the output of BGM2 related to the reach preview effect continues, and a specified second emphasis sound is output as a sound effect. Furthermore, during the high-brightness effect WO22, at least a portion of the effect lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) continue to emit light in the character appearance light-emitting mode.

When the high-brightness effect WO22 ends and the reach preview effect image 171 including the dialogue string becomes fully visible (Figure 20 (e)), a predetermined reach preview voice is output as a dialogue sound (dialogue output effect). This reach preview voice corresponds to the dialogue string displayed on the screen, and in this case, "It's reach." However, this is not limited to this, and the dialogue output effect of "It's reach" may be configured to be executed while the high-brightness effect WO22 is being executed, or may be configured to be executed from the moment the dialogue string appears before the high-brightness effect WO22 is executed. Furthermore, during the dialogue output effect, the output of BGM2 related to the reach preview effect continues, and at least a portion of the effect lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) emit light in a dialogue output light-emitting mode (here, blue) that corresponds to the character color of the dialogue string (i.e., the reliability information).

When the dialogue output effect ends, an end effect (specific image end effect) is executed to terminate the display of the reach preview effect image 171 related to the reach preview effect and switch to a symbol-changing screen (Figure 20(f)). During this end effect, at least a portion of the effect lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) emit light in an end-of-game light-emitting mode (e.g., orange) that differs from the previous dialogue output light-emitting mode (here, blue) or text appearance light-emitting mode (here, a cyclical change between blue and white). However, this end-of-game light-emitting mode may be configured to be the same as either the dialogue output light-emitting mode or the text appearance light-emitting mode. When the symbol-changing screen begins after the end effect (Figure 20(g)), a symbol stop sound is output as a sound effect in synchronization with the stopping of the decorative symbols 164a-164c. Note that the reach preview effect shown in Figure 20 differs in jackpot reliability from the step-up preview effect shown in Figure 15, with the latter having a higher jackpot reliability than the former (Figure 12).

The high-brightness effect (A-2 high-brightness effect) WO22 may be configured to have a different execution time than the high-brightness effect (A-1 high-brightness effect) WO21, or they may be configured to have the same execution time. The two may also be configured to have different or identical transmittances for the high-brightness image. The display range of the high-brightness image may also be different or identical. Because no text is displayed during the execution of the high-brightness effect (A-1 high-brightness effect) WO21, but text is displayed during the execution of the high-brightness effect (A-2 high-brightness effect) WO22, it is sufficient for the high-brightness effect (A-2 high-brightness effect) WO22 to display a high-brightness image that makes at least the text difficult to see. For example, the high-brightness image may be configured to have different transmittances for the character (kappa) portion and the text portion. Alternatively, the high-brightness image may be executed so that it does not overlap or only partially overlaps the character (kappa) portion, and so that it overlaps the text portion. When dynamically displaying the character (kappa) and/or text, it is desirable that they are always dynamically displayed within the display range of the high-brightness image. However, this is not limited to this, and the dynamic display of the character (kappa) and/or text may be configured so that there are times when they overlap the display range of the high-brightness image and times when they do not. This allows the visibility of the character (kappa) and/or text to change during dynamic display, improving the visual effect. The dynamic pattern used when dynamically displaying the character (kappa) and/or text during high-brightness effect execution may be configured to be different from the dynamic pattern used when dynamically displaying the character (kappa) and/or text after the high-brightness effect execution has ended.

Next, we will explain in more detail the presentation period centered on the high-brightness presentations WO21 and WO22 for the reach preview presentation shown in Figure 20. Figures 21 to 23 show the changes in the display screen and light-emitting means at even shorter time intervals than in Figure 20 for the period from Figure 20(b) to (g), that is, the period from the start of the high-brightness presentation WO21 to the end of the reach preview presentation and transition to the changing screen of the decorative pattern 164. Note that the 20 frames of display images shown in Figures 21 to 23 are extracted at a constant interval from all frames during the period from Figure 20(b) to (g). Therefore, in Figures 21 to 23, the time interval between adjacent frames is the same, A milliseconds, as in Figures 16 to 18 for the step-up preview presentation.

First, we will explain the details of the high-brightness effect WO21. In the high-brightness effect WO21 shown in Figures 21(a) to (f), at the start, a high-brightness image 170c is displayed in front of the reach preview effect image 171 and behind the mini symbol 165, reserved base image 168, and the reserved images X1 to X4 and Y1 to Y4 in front of them (Figure 21(a)). The transmittance of this high-brightness image 170c gradually changes and eventually disappears (Figure 21(f)).

Here, the high-brightness image 170c is displayed in a range (size) that covers the entire reach preview effect image 171, with a uniform transmittance within that display range; the display range does not change over time, but the transmittance changes over time (transmittance change processing, transmittance change effect). The transmittance of the high-brightness image 170c is minimum (25% here) at the start of display (Figure 21(a)) and is configured to gradually increase (rise) over time, for example, at a constant rate of change (first display pattern). That is, the high-brightness effect WO21 is composed of a low-transmittance change effect that decreases the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170c, and a high-transmittance change effect that increases the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170c, with the latter (Figures 21(a)-(f)) having a longer execution time than the former (Figure 21(a)). Note that the minimum transmittance of the high-brightness image 170c is greater than 0% (25% in this case), and even at the start of display when this minimum transmittance is reached (Figure 21(a)), the reach preview effect image 171 is slightly visible. The transmittance of the high-brightness image 170c at the start of display may be set to 0%, so that the display content behind the high-brightness image 170c cannot be seen at the start of display.

Of course, the high-brightness image 170c may be set to a display range (size) such that the coverage rate of the reach preview effect image 171 is less than 100%, or the transmittance within the display range may be non-uniform. The display range (size) may also be changed over time, with or without changing the transmittance. The minimum transmittance of the high-brightness image 170c may also be set to 0%. The execution time of the high-transmittance change effect may be shorter than that of the low-transmittance change effect, or the execution times of both may be approximately the same.

Furthermore, at a predetermined point during the high-brightness effect WO21, for example, at its start (Figure 21(a)), the effect scenario is switched, causing the reach preview effect image 171 behind the high-brightness image 170c to switch from the previous image of the reach preview first half effect RC1 to the image of the reach preview second half effect RC2. In other words, the high-brightness effect WO21 is an example of a high-brightness effect during image change that can be executed when performing an image change process to change from the first image to the second image, and is an example of a high-brightness effect during scenario change that is executed when the effect scenario is switched. As a result, after the start of the high-brightness effect WO21, the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170c gradually increases, improving the visibility of the reach preview effect image 171. When the high-brightness image 170c eventually disappears (Figure 21(f)), the entire reach preview effect image 171 (excluding the portion hidden behind the mini-pattern 165, etc.) becomes completely visible.

Note that while the high-brightness effect WO21 is being executed, the mini-pattern 165 cycles from between "3, 5, 7" and "4, 6, 8" (Figure 21(a)) to "8, 2, 4" (Figure 21(f)). In other words, the execution time of the high-brightness effect WO21 (Figures 21(a)-(f)) is longer than the period it takes for the mini-pattern 165 to cycle through one cycle.

Furthermore, during the high-brightness effect WO21, the effect lamp L emits light in a medium-high-brightness light-emitting mode. The medium-high-brightness light-emitting mode is configured to emit a predetermined color (here, white) until a predetermined point in time during the high-brightness effect WO21 (Figures 21(a)-(b)), and then change to a specific color (here, blue) thereafter (Figures 21(c)-(e)).

When the high-brightness effect WO21 ends and the reach preview effect image 171 becomes fully visible (Figure 21 (f)), the text information display start effect (Figures 21 (f)-(h)) is performed simultaneously, or at a predetermined timing thereafter. In this text information display start effect, the dialogue string (text information) "It's reach!" appears in front of the character image, etc., accompanied by a first dynamic display effect (first dynamic display period). In this first dynamic display effect, the dialogue string moves toward a predetermined display position at a first change speed (here, movement involving rotation and shrinking). This first dynamic display effect involving rotation and shrinking causes the player to perceive the dialogue string as moving toward the back of the screen, for example, while rotating clockwise. Note that while the dialogue string "It's reach!" is displayed in "blue" (Figure 19 (a)), the display mode (display color and shape) of the dialogue string does not change during the first dynamic display effect (specific display processing is not executed to display the text information in a specific display mode).

When the dialogue string reaches the predetermined display position after the first dynamic display effect (Figure 21(h)), a high-brightness effect WO22 (Figures 21(h) to 22(l)) is executed, which displays a high-brightness image 170d to reduce the visibility of the image behind the high-brightness image 170d (here, the reach preview effect image 171). Unlike the high-brightness effect WO21, this high-brightness effect WO22 is executed when the effect scenario is not switched, i.e., when the reach preview effect image 171 is not changed. In this way, the high-brightness effect WO22 is an example of a high-brightness effect when no image change occurs that can be executed when the predetermined image is not changed (image change), and is an example of a high-brightness effect when no scenario change occurs that is executed when the effect scenario is not switched.

In this high-brightness effect WO22, similar to high-brightness effect WO21, high-brightness image 170d appears in front of reach preview effect image 171 and behind mini symbol 165, reserved base image 168, and the reserved images X1-X4, Y1-Y4 in front of it, and then disappears; however, the change (display pattern) of high-brightness image 170d is different from high-brightness image 170b in high-brightness effect WO21. Note that the high-brightness image may also be configured to appear in front of reserved base image 168 and the reserved images X1-X4, Y1-Y4 in front of it, and this is similar for other effects.

That is, high-brightness image 170d is displayed in a range (size) that covers the entire reach-prediction effect image 171, with a uniform transmittance within that display range. While the display range does not change over time, the transmittance changes over time (transmittance change processing, transmittance change effect), similar to high-brightness image 170c, but differs in that its transmittance gradually decreases over time, reaching a minimum (here, 40%) at a predetermined point (Figures 21(h) to 22(j)), and then gradually increases over time (Figures 22(j) to (l)) (second display pattern). Thus, high-brightness effect WO22 is comprised of a low-transmittance change effect that decreases the transmittance of high-brightness image 170d, and a high-transmittance change effect that increases the transmittance of high-brightness image 170d, with the former (Figures 21(h) to 22(j)) and the latter (Figures 22(j) to (l)) having approximately the same execution time. Of course, the execution time of the high transmittance change effect may be longer than that of the low transmittance change effect, or vice versa. Note that in the high-brightness image 170d, the minimum transmittance is greater than 0% (here, 40%), and the reach preview effect image 171 remains visible even at the specified point in time when this minimum transmittance is reached (Figure 22 (j)).

Note that while the high-brightness effect WO22 is being executed, the mini-pattern 165 goes from "5, 7, 1" (Fig. 21(h)) to "7, 1, 3" (Fig. 22(l)). In other words, the execution time of the high-brightness effect WO22 (Fig. 21(h) to Fig. 22(l)) is longer than the period it takes for the mini-pattern 165 to go through one cycle. Also, the execution time of the high-transmittance change effect may be longer than that of the low-transmittance change effect, or vice versa.

During this high-brightness effect WO22, an arrival emphasis operation is performed to emphasize that the dialogue string has reached a predetermined display position; in this case, an expansion/contraction operation (enlargement/reduction operation) of the dialogue string is performed (Figures 21(h) to 22(l)). Note that the type of arrival emphasis operation is arbitrary, and may be any type, such as a bounding operation of the dialogue string or a transformation operation other than enlargement/reduction. The high-brightness effect WO22 may also be configured to be executed when the arrival emphasis operation of the dialogue string is completed. In other words, the high-brightness effect WO22 may be configured not to perform a transformation operation of the dialogue string. Alternatively, the high-brightness effect WO22 may be configured to perform only a smaller transformation operation on the dialogue string than the arrival emphasis operation of the dialogue string performed before the high-brightness effect WO22 is executed.

In addition, during the period from the text information display start effect to the high-brightness effect WO22, the effect lamp L emits light in a text appearance light-emitting mode. The text appearance light-emitting mode is a cyclical change mode that cycles through multiple colors (e.g., blue and white) including the text color of the dialogue string displayed on the screen (blue in this case), and the light color changes as follows: white (Figures 21(f)-(g)) → blue (Figures 21(h)-(i)) → white (Figures 22(j)-(k)).

When the high-brightness effect WO22 ends and the entire reach-prediction effect image 171, including the dialogue string, becomes visible (Figure 22 (l)), a dialogue output effect is performed, and the dialogue sound "It's reach" (reach-prediction voice) corresponding to the dialogue string (text information) displayed on the screen is output. During this dialogue output effect (second dynamic display period), a second dynamic display effect is performed on the dialogue string (Figures 22 (l)-(p)). In this second dynamic display effect, the dialogue string is displayed at a second change speed (here, slower than the first change speed) that is different from the change speed during the first dynamic display effect (first change speed), for example, by slowly shrinking. This shrinking display causes the player to perceive the dialogue string as moving toward the back of the screen.

Note that during the second dynamic display period in which the second dynamic display effect is performed on the dialogue character string, the mini-pattern 165 goes from "7, 1, 3" (Fig. 22(l)) to "1, 3, 5" (Fig. 22(p)). In other words, the second dynamic display period (Fig. 22(l)-(p)) is longer than the period in which the mini-pattern 165 goes through one cycle, and is also longer than the first dynamic display period (Fig. 21(f)-(h)). Note that in the example of Fig. 21, the first dynamic display period (Fig. 21(f)-(h)) is shorter than the period in which the mini-pattern goes through one cycle.

During this second dynamic display effect (Figures 22(l)-(p)), a display mode change process (specific display process that displays text information in a specific display mode) is performed to change the display mode (here, the display color) of the dialogue string. This display mode change process is performed within the outline of the dialogue string (text information). For example, the display color of the characters corresponding to the dialogue sound being output temporarily changes (e.g., from blue to white). This results in the perception that a white portion of the blue "It's a win!" string is moving, for example, from left to right. When performing this predetermined change effect within the outline of the dialogue string, the dialogue string may be configured to be displayed dynamically, or an effect image may be displayed in a static state. Note that when this dialogue sound is output, it is desirable to have the character image perform a so-called lip-syncing motion (speaking action). Furthermore, the display mode change process (specific display process that displays text information in a specific display mode) in which the white portion of the dialogue string moves is preferably performed in response to the output of the dialogue sound. By synchronizing the output timing of the dialogue sounds with the change (movement) of the display color of the dialogue text in this way, it is possible to more clearly express the relationship between the output of the dialogue sounds and the dialogue text being output, even if lip-syncing (speaking) is not involved. The lip-syncing may be performed while the high-brightness image is being displayed, or may be configured to be performed after the display of the high-brightness image has ended. If lip-syncing is performed while the high-brightness image is being displayed, it is desirable to configure the lip-syncing to be performed at least while the dialogue text is being displayed or after the first dynamic display of the dialogue text has ended, but this is not limiting, and the lip-syncing may be configured to be performed during the first dynamic display.

In addition, during the dialogue output effect, the effect lamp L emits light in a dialogue output light mode that corresponds to the character color of the dialogue string (here, blue), i.e., blue (Figures 22 (l) to (p)).

When the dialogue output effect (Fig. 22 (l) to (p)) ends (i.e., after the second dynamic display period), an end effect (specific image end effect, text information display end effect) is performed to end the display of the reach preview effect image 171 related to the reach preview effect and switch to a pattern changing screen (Fig. 22 (q) to Fig. 23 (t)). In this end effect, a concealed image 172 that conceals the reach preview effect image 171 is displayed in front of the reach preview effect image 171, and the pattern changing screen appears when the display of the concealed image 172 ends. In the end-of-game effect of this embodiment, the hidden image 172 is composed of a curtain and a character pulling it. The character closes the curtain to conceal the reach preview effect image 171 (FIGS. 22(q)-22(r)). The character then opens the curtain, gradually revealing the variable screen of the decorative pattern 164 (excluding the portion hidden behind the mini-pattern 165, etc.) (FIGS. 22(r) → 23(t)). Note that the display mode (display color and shape) of the dialogue text remains unchanged during this end-of-game effect (a specific display process for displaying text information in a specific display mode is not executed). While a white image is used as the hidden image 172, this is not a limitation. For example, a display color suggesting reliability or another color may also be used. The transmittance of the hidden image 172 may be greater than 0%. If the hidden image 172 is another color, it is desirable to use an image with a color or pattern that is at least different from the high-brightness image. Concealed image 172 may also be configured to be displayed in an area including the front of hold base image 168 and hold images X1-X4, Y1-Y4 so as to overlap them. The display period of concealed image 172 may be configured to be different from the display period of the high-brightness image, or may be the same period. If the periods are different, the display period of concealed image 172 may be configured to be longer than the display period of the high-brightness image, or conversely, may be configured to be shorter.

In addition, during the end effect, the effect lamp L will emit light in the end effect illumination mode, for example, orange (Figures 22(q) to 23(s)).

In addition, when comparing the execution times of the high-brightness effects WO21, WO22 and the end-time effects in the reach preview effects, the high-brightness effect WO21 (Figures 21(a) to (f)) is approximately 5A milliseconds, the high-brightness effect WO22 (Figures 21(h) to 22(l)) is approximately 4A milliseconds, and the end-time effect is approximately 4A milliseconds, but the execution time of the end-time effect may be shorter than the execution time of the high-brightness effect WO22, or conversely, it may be longer.

As described above, the reach preview effect can execute a high-brightness effect (A-1 high-brightness effect) WO21 that displays a high-brightness image (A-1 first high-brightness image) 170c, and a high-brightness effect (A-2 high-brightness effect) WO22 that displays a high-brightness image (A-2 second high-brightness image) 170d. The high-brightness effect WO21 is executed at the first timing when the scene changes (switching from the first scene image to the second scene image) accompanying the transition from the reach preview first half effect RC1 to the reach preview second half effect RC2, and the high-brightness effect WO22 is executed at the second timing thereafter. Note that at the first timing when the high-brightness effect WO21 is executed, the dialogue string (character image) containing reliability information regarding the jackpot is not yet displayed on the screen, but is displayed at the second timing thereafter.

Furthermore, in the reach preview effect, the display of a character image containing jackpot reliability information begins before the high-brightness effect WO22, and an end effect (specific image end effect) can be executed when the display of the character image ends (Fig. 22 (q) to Fig. 23 (t)). Furthermore, during the high-brightness effect WO22, a first light-emitting effect is executed in which the effect lamp (light-emitting means) L is illuminated in a character appearance light-emitting mode (first light-emitting mode) that corresponds to the reliability information (e.g., display color) in the character image, and during the end effect (specific image end effect), a second light-emitting effect is executed in which the effect lamp (light-emitting means) L is illuminated in an end light-emitting mode (second light-emitting mode) that differs from the character appearance light-emitting mode (first light-emitting mode).

Furthermore, the reach preview effect can execute two types of effects: a high-brightness effect (high-brightness effect when image is changed) WO21, which can be executed when performing an image change process to switch from the image (first image) of the reach preview first half effect RC1 to the image (second image) of the reach preview second half effect RC2; and a high-brightness effect (high-brightness effect when image is not changed) WO22, which can be executed when the image change process is not performed. The high-brightness effect WO21 and the high-brightness effect WO22 have different minimum transmittances (transparency performance) of the high-brightness image. Note that while the minimum transmittance is different here as an example of the transparency performance of the high-brightness image, other transparency performances, such as the range (size) of the high-brightness image or the distribution of transmittance, may also be different. Furthermore, the image change process is not limited to switching from the image (first image) of the reach preview first half effect RC1 to the image (second image) of the reach preview second half effect RC2, but may be any process that switches from a specified first image to a specified second image. In other words, an image that is displayed before the high-brightness effect is executed but not displayed after it is executed corresponds to the first image, and an image that is not displayed before the high-brightness effect is executed but is displayed after it is executed corresponds to the second image. In this way, if there are images (first image and second image) whose display can be switched before and after the high-brightness effect, it can be considered that image change processing is being executed.

The reach preview effect is an example of a text information display effect that displays text information (here, dynamically displays it). It can execute a text information display start effect (a first specific effect executed when the text information display starts) that starts the display of text information, and an end effect (a second specific effect executed when the text information display ends) that ends the display of text information. After the text information display start effect is executed (during the first specific effect), a display mode change process (specific display process that displays the text information in a specific display mode) (Figures 22 (l) to (p)) is executed to change the display mode of the text information, and the display mode change process (specific display process) is not executed during the end effect (second specific effect). However, this is not limited to this, and the display mode change process (specific display process) may also be executed during the end effect (second specific effect). In this case, the display mode change process that began after the text information display start effect (during the first specific effect) is executed continues during the end effect (second specific effect). Additionally, a different display mode change effect, different from the display mode change effect that began after the text information display start effect was executed (during the first specific effect), may be configured to be executed during the execution of the end effect (second specific effect).

In addition, the reach preview performance includes a high-brightness performance WO21 that is executed when the performance scenario is switched (high-brightness performance when scenario is switched), and a high-brightness performance WO22 that is executed when the performance scenario is not switched (high-brightness performance when scenario is not switched).In the high-brightness performance WO21, a high-brightness image 170c is displayed in a first display pattern, and in the high-brightness performance WO22, a high-brightness image 170d is displayed in a second display pattern that is different from the first display pattern.The high-brightness performance WO21 (Figures 21(a) to (f)) has a longer execution time than the high-brightness performance WO22 (Figures 21(h) to 22(l)). As described above, the minimum transmittance (transmission performance) of the high-brightness image differs between high-brightness effect WO21 and high-brightness effect WO22, with high-brightness image 170d of high-brightness effect WO22 having a higher minimum transmittance than high-brightness image 170c of high-brightness effect WO21. The minimum transmittance of high-brightness image 170d of high-brightness effect WO22 may be smaller than that of high-brightness image 170c of high-brightness effect WO21, or may be approximately the same. Other transmission performance, such as the maximum range (size) and transmittance distribution of the high-brightness image, may also differ between high-brightness effect WO21 and high-brightness effect WO22. In this case, high-brightness effect WO21 may be large and high-brightness effect WO22 may be small, or high-brightness effect WO21 may be small and high-brightness effect WO22 may be large.

In addition, the reach preview effect can execute a first dynamic display effect in which the dialogue string moves toward a predetermined display position at a first change speed (here, a movement involving rotation and shrinking), and a second dynamic display effect in which the dialogue string is displayed at a second change speed (here, slower than the first change speed) that is different from the change speed during the first dynamic display effect (first change speed), for example, slowly shrinking. During the second dynamic display effect, a display mode change process (specific display process that displays the text information in a specific display mode) is executed to change the display mode (here, the display color) of the dialogue string (text information), but the display mode change process (specific display process) is not executed during the first dynamic display effect. Note that the display mode change process (specific display process) is executed within the outline of the dialogue string (text information). Also, during the first dynamic display effect, a text information display start effect (first specific effect executed when the display of text information is started) is executed to start the display of the dialogue string (text information). The display mode (display color and shape) of the dialogue string (text information) does not change during the end effect (second specific effect performed when the display of text information is ended) that ends the display of the dialogue string (text information) (specific display processing is not executed).

The reach preview effect includes a first dynamic display period in which the dialogue string is dynamically displayed at a first change speed toward a predetermined display position, and a second dynamic display period in which the dialogue string is dynamically displayed at a second change speed slower than the first change speed, with the second dynamic display period (FIGS. 22(l)-(p)) being longer than the first dynamic display period (FIGS. 21(f)-(h)). During the first dynamic display period, a text information display start effect (first specific effect) is executed when the dialogue string (text information) starts to be displayed, and after the second dynamic display period, an end effect (second specific effect) is executed when the dialogue string (text information) ends to be displayed. The second dynamic display period is longer than the time it takes for the mini symbol 165 to change in one cycle. The first dynamic display period is also longer than the time it takes for the mini symbol 165 to change in one cycle.

The reach preview effect is an example of a text information display effect that displays text information, and is capable of executing a text information display start effect (first specific effect) that is executed when the display of text information begins, and an end effect (second specific effect) that is executed when the display of text information ends.After the text information display start effect is executed, a display mode change process (specific display process that displays text information in a specific display mode) (Figures 22 (l) to (p)) is executed to change the display mode of the text information, and the display mode change process (specific display process) is not executed while the end effect is being executed.

Furthermore, the reach preview effects include a high-brightness effect (high-brightness effect when image is changed) WO21 that can be executed when an image change process is performed to change the reach preview effect image 171 from the first image to the second image, and a high-brightness effect (high-brightness effect when image is not changed) WO22 that can be executed when the reach preview effect image (predetermined image) 171 is not changed (image change process is not performed). The execution times of the high-brightness effect WO22 and the high-brightness effect WO21 are approximately the same, and the execution times of the high-brightness effects WO21 and WO22 are longer than the execution time of one cycle of the mini pattern 165. Note that the execution time of the high-brightness effect (high-brightness effect when image is changed) WO21 may be longer than the execution time of the high-brightness effect (high-brightness effect when image is not changed) WO22, or vice versa.

Furthermore, the minimum transmittance of the high-brightness image differs between high-brightness effect (high-brightness effect when image is changed) WO21 and high-brightness effect (high-brightness effect when image is not changed) WO22. That is, high-brightness image 170c in high-brightness effect WO21 has a minimum transmittance of 25%, while high-brightness image 170d in high-brightness effect WO22 has a minimum transmittance of 40%. Thus, high-brightness image 170d in high-brightness effect WO22 has a higher minimum transmittance than high-brightness image 170c in high-brightness effect WO21.

The various configurations in the reach preview performance described above are not limited to this reach preview performance, but can also be used in various other performances (preview performances and partial performances). For example, the various configurations of the high-brightness performances WO21 and WO22, end performances, etc. in the reach preview performance may also be used in the step-up preview performance described above, the button preview performances 1 and 2 described below, and the dialogue preview performance. In other words, if the (preview) performance involves the execution of a high-brightness performance or end performance, the content of the high-brightness performances WO21 and WO22, end performances, etc. in this preview performance may be configured to be used in a different performance. It goes without saying that the same can also be used in the text information display start performance and display mode change processing that are executed in conjunction with this.

[Button preview effect 1]
24 to 27 show an example of a button preview effect 1 executed during a reach fluctuation in a reach fluctuation pattern. This button preview effect (operation effect) 1 is an effect (related to the player's operation of the operation means) that requires the player to operate the effect button (operation means) 34, and suggests the reliability of a jackpot, etc., by executing a predetermined post-operation effect based on the establishment of one or more conditions, including the operation of the effect button 34 during the valid operation period. There are multiple types of post-operation effects, for example, two types: a post-operation success effect and a post-operation failure effect, and the post-operation success effect has a higher reliability of a jackpot than a post-operation failure effect.

Next, a specific example of this button preview effect 1 will be explained using the case where a post-operation success effect is selected as the post-operation effect, but first an overview will be provided with reference to Figure 24. When button preview effect 1 begins after a reach is achieved in the reach fluctuation pattern, BGM 3 related to this button preview effect 1 begins to be output from speakers 18, 25 as background music. On the display screen 58a, the rapidly fluctuating middle decorative pattern 164c disappears, leaving only the left decorative pattern 164a and right decorative pattern 164b that make up the reach. The reserved base image 168 is displayed at the bottom, and the mini pattern 165 is displayed at the top, with the button preview effect image 173 related to button introduction effect BA0 displayed behind them (Figures 24(a) and (b)).

In the button preview effect image 173 of this button introduction effect BA0, for example, a character image 174 with a serious expression and a text image 175 such as "Make the character laugh" are displayed on the screen in that order, allowing a player to recognize that this effect suggests the possibility of a jackpot depending on whether the character laughs or not. Furthermore, at the start of this button introduction effect BA0 (FIGS. 24(a) and (b)), for example, a predetermined introductory sound is output from the speakers 18 and 25 as a sound effect, and a line corresponding to the text image 175, i.e., "Make the character laugh," is output in sync with the display of the text image 175. Furthermore, during this button introduction effect BA0 (FIGS. 24(a) and (b)), at least a portion of the effect lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) emit light in an introduction mode (predetermined light-emitting mode) corresponding to this button introduction effect BA0, for example, in light blue.

Following the button introduction effect BA0 (Figs. 24(a) and (b)), an operation prompt effect BA1 (Figs. 24(c)-(d)) is performed, which displays an operation prompt image 176 that prompts the user to operate the effect button (operation means) 34. Here, the operation prompt image 176 is composed of a button image (operation target image) 176a indicating the effect button (operation means) 34 that is the operation target, and an operation mode notification image 176b indicating the operation mode for the effect button 34 that is the operation target. For example, the operation mode notification image 176b is displayed approximately in the center of the screen in place of the text image 175 that reads "Make the character laugh." The operation mode notification image 176b is composed of an arrow indicating the direction in which the effect button 34 is pressed and the text "PUSH."

Furthermore, during execution of operation prompting effect BA1, high-brightness effect WO31 is executed, which displays high-brightness image 170e to reduce the visibility of the image behind high-brightness image 170e (here, operation prompting image 176) (Figure 24 (c)). This high-brightness effect WO31 emphasizes the appearance of operation prompting image 176, i.e., the start of the valid operation period. During this high-brightness effect WO31, BGM3 related to button preview effect 1 continues to be output. At the start of high-brightness effect WO31, a predetermined first emphasis sound is output as a sound effect. Furthermore, during high-brightness effect WO31, at least a portion of effect lamps L (here, both frame-side lamp La and board-side lamp Lb) emit light in a first medium high-brightness light-emitting mode, for example, blue. Although not shown, a gauge section indicating the progress of the valid operation period may also be displayed. In this case, the gauge section begins displaying when the display of high-brightness image 170e ends (FIG. 24(d)), and is displayed so that its display mode changes as the valid operation period elapses. The display range of high-brightness image 170e may be configured to be displayed in a range that overlaps the area where the gauge section is scheduled to be displayed thereafter, or in a range that does not overlap the area where the gauge section is scheduled to be displayed and that overlaps only with the operation prompt image. The high-brightness image may also be displayed so that it overlaps with the character image. The execution time of high-brightness effect WO31 may be configured to differ from the execution times of high-brightness effects WO21 and WO22. In this case, the former may be longer or shorter than the latter.

During operation prompt effect BA1, output of BGM3 related to button preview effect 1 continues even after high-brightness effect WO31 ends. Furthermore, after high-brightness effect WO31 ends, at least some of the effect lamps L (here, both frame-side lamps La and board-side lamps Lb) will emit light in an operation-waiting illumination mode, for example, flashing blue.

When the effect button 34 is operated during the operation prompt effect BA1, i.e., during the valid operation period, a high-brightness effect WO32 is performed, which displays a high-brightness image 170f to reduce the visibility of the image behind the high-brightness image 170f (here, the operation prompt image 176) (Figure 24(e)). During the high-brightness effect WO32, a post-operation success effect BA2A is initiated as a post-operation effect BA2. During the high-brightness effect WO32, the high-brightness image 170f begins to be displayed in the area corresponding to the operation prompt image 176 (Figure 24(e)). While the high-brightness image 170f is displayed (during the high-brightness effect WO32), the operation prompt image 176 is removed from the screen, and, for example, a character image 174 with a serious expression begins a predetermined action (Figure 24(f)). In this case, the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170f in the high-brightness effect WO32 may be reduced, and the operation prompt image 176 may be configured to be invisible and then disappear from the screen.

Then, by displaying the high-brightness image 170g, a high-brightness effect WO33 is performed that reduces the visibility of the image behind the high-brightness image 170g (here, character image 174) (Figure 24(g)), and during this high-brightness effect WO33, the character image 174 changes from a serious expression to a smiling face. In this case, the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170g in the high-brightness effect BA33 may be increased, and the character image 174 may be changed while still visible (with reduced visibility).

BGM3 related to button preview effect 1 continues to be output even while post-operation success effect BA2A is being executed. At the start of high-brightness effects WO32 and WO33, second and third accent sounds are output as sound effects, respectively. During high-brightness effect WO32, at least some of the effect lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) emit light in a second high-brightness medium light-emitting mode, for example, white, and during the subsequent high-brightness effect WO33, at least some of the effect lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) emit light in a success light-emitting mode, for example, red. After high-brightness effect WO32 ends, effect lamps L are temporarily turned off until high-brightness effect WO33 begins. In the case of a post-operation failure effect, during high-brightness effect WO33, they emit light in a failure light-emitting mode different from the success light-emitting mode, for example, green.

After the above operation, when the success effect BA2A ends, a jackpot variation result effect is displayed, the middle decorative symbol 164c stops, and a jackpot effect such as "7-7-7" is achieved (Figure 24 (h)). During this jackpot variation result effect, a jackpot stop sound is output as a sound effect, and at least a portion of the effect lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) emits light in a jackpot stop light-emitting mode, for example, flashing red.

Next, we will provide a more detailed explanation of the button preview effect 1 shown in Figure 24, focusing on the button introduction effect BA0 and the high-brightness effects WO31-33. Figure 21 shows the changes in the display screen and light-emitting means over the period from Figure 24(a) to (b), Figure 26 shows the period from Figure 24(c) to (d), and Figure 27 shows the period from Figure 24(e) to (g), each at even shorter time intervals than Figure 24. Note that in Figures 25 to 27, the time interval between adjacent frames is the same, A milliseconds, as in Figures 16 to 18 for the step-up preview effect.

First, the details of button introduction effect BA0 will be explained. In button introduction effect BA0, as shown in Figures 25(a) to 25(e), a character string image 175, "Make the character laugh," is displayed on the screen, for example, so that the characters appear sequentially from the beginning to the end of the string at a predetermined speed. This character string image 175 is displayed in a common display format regardless of whether a post-operation success effect or a post-operation failure effect is selected as the post-operation effect. In other words, character string image 175 is an example of non-specific character information to which reliability information, whose display format corresponds to the reliability of the occurrence of a predetermined event (such as the reliability of a jackpot), is not attached. Note that the time required from the start of display of character string image 175 to its completion (i.e., when character string image 175 becomes easily recognizable) (Figures 25(a) to 25(e)) is 4A milliseconds.

Here, the character string image 175 uses red (specific color) and white (non-specific color) as the character colors. The first character of each line, i.e., the "ki" in "character" in the first column and the "warai" in "waraisero" in the second column, is displayed in red, while the other characters are displayed in white (non-specific color). The number of characters without red (specific color) is greater than the number of characters with red (specific color). Furthermore, during the button introduction effect BA0 (FIGS. 24(a) and (b)) in which the character string image 175 is displayed, at least some of the effect lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) emit light in the introduction light-emitting mode (FIGS. 24(a) and (b)). However, the light color in this introduction light-emitting mode does not correspond to the specific color (red), e.g., light blue (FIGS. 25(a) to 25(e)). Note that when the character string image 175 is displayed, the effect lamps L may emit light in a color corresponding to the specific color.

The character color of the character string image 175 may all be red (specific color), and the effect lamp L may be configured to emit a color other than red (specific color). Furthermore, if the character color of the character string image 175 is all red (specific color) but is not used as a color suggesting reliability, it is desirable to make the outline of the character string image 175 different from the outline of the character string when red (specific color) is used as a color suggesting reliability. In this case, red (specific color) may be used as the outline of the character string when red (specific color) is used as a color suggesting reliability, or another color may be used. If another color is used, it is desirable to use a color that is not used when the color is not expressed as a color suggesting reliability. Furthermore, not only the color of the outline, but also the thickness and shape of the outline may be different. Furthermore, the sound effect when the character string image is displayed may be different. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which no sound effect is output when the color is not used as a color suggesting reliability, and a sound effect is output when the color is used as a color suggesting reliability. Furthermore, if the character color of the character string image 175 is all red (specific color) but is not used as a color suggesting reliability, it is desirable to configure the outline of the character string image 175 in a color other than red (specific color). In this case, the thickness and shape of the character outline may be expanded so that the outline portion occupies a larger display area than the red (specific color) portion of the character. Furthermore, the thickness and shape of the outline portion of only specific characters in the character string image 175 may be made different. When such outline representation is used, even if the character color is red (specific color), it may not be used as a color suggesting reliability. In this case, the character color of characters other than the specific characters may be red (specific color) or a color other than red (specific color). Conversely, such representation may be used only when a color suggesting reliability is used, and such representation may not be used when a color not suggesting reliability is used.

As described above, the character string image 175 uses red (specific color) as the character color. However, as noted above, the character string image 175 is non-specific character information with no added reliability information, and this red (specific color) does not indicate the reliability of the occurrence of a predetermined event (such as the reliability of a jackpot). In this way, by using multiple colors, including the specific color, to display each character in the character string image 175, the appearance of the character string can be diversified and improved. Moreover, because the specific color is used only for some characters and the effect lamp L emits a color (light blue) that does not correspond to the specific color, the possibility of the specific color being mistakenly interpreted as indicating reliability is reduced. Furthermore, when the effect lamp L is illuminated in a color that does not correspond to the specific color, the effect lamp L may be illuminated in a color that corresponds to the character color of the character string image 175 composed of colors other than the specific color. For example, if specific characters in the character string image 175 are displayed in red (specific color) as the character color, and the other characters are displayed in white (non-specific color), the effect lamp L may be configured to emit white (non-specific color). The effect lamp L may also be configured to emit light in the outline color of the characters. For example, if the outline color of the characters is yellow (non-specific color), the effect lamp L may be configured to emit light in yellow (non-specific color).

However, without being limited to this, the character string image 175 may be configured to be displayed in a display mode that indicates the reliability of the occurrence of a predetermined event (reliability of a jackpot or expected success of a button preview effect). In such cases, even if the character string image 175 is configured to be displayable in any of multiple display modes that indicate different reliability levels, it is desirable that the high-brightness effect executed thereafter be the same. Furthermore, without being limited to this, if the character string image 175 is configured to be displayable in any of multiple display modes that indicate different reliability levels, different high-brightness effects may be executed when a character string image 175 with low reliability is displayed and when a character string image 175 with high reliability is displayed. For example, the high-brightness image may be configured to be displayed over a wider area when a character string image 175 with high reliability is displayed. That is, when a low-reliability character string image 175 is displayed, a high-brightness image is displayed in an area that overlaps with the operation prompt image, whereas when a high-reliability character string image 175 is displayed, a high-brightness image may be displayed in an area that overlaps not only the operation prompt image but also all or at least one of the other display elements such as designs, button preview effects, character images, background effects, etc. Conversely, when a low-reliability character string image 175 is displayed, a high-brightness image may be displayed over a wider area.

Next, we will explain the details of the high-brightness effect WO31. In the high-brightness effect (first range high-brightness effect) WO31 shown in Figures 26(a)-(e), at the start of the high-brightness effect, a high-brightness image 170e is displayed in front of the button preview effect image 173 and behind the miniature pattern 165, the reserved base image 168, and the reserved images X1-X4 and Y1-Y4 in front of them (Figure 26(a)). The size and transparency of the high-brightness image 170e gradually change until it finally disappears (Figure 26(e)). Here, the high-brightness image 170e is displayed in a size (range) corresponding to a portion of the button preview effect image 173, in this case the area between the left and right decorative patterns 164a and 164b, and the transparency is uniform within the display range, with the size (range) and transparency changing over time.

When the display of the high-brightness image 170e begins (Figure 26(a)), the character string image 175 is erased at that point, and an operation prompt image 176 is displayed within the display range of the high-brightness image 170e. The size (range) of the high-brightness image 170e is configured to be maximum at the start of display (Figure 26(a)) and gradually decrease over time. That is, the high-brightness effect WO31 is composed of an enlargement change effect that changes the size (range) of the high-brightness image 170e in the enlargement direction, and a reduction change effect that changes the size (range) of the high-brightness image 170e in the reduction direction, with the latter (Figures 26(a)-(e)) taking longer to execute than the former (Figure 26(a)). Note that if the device is configured to be able to display any one of multiple types of operation prompt images, the display size of the high-brightness image may be configured to differ depending on the operation prompt image being displayed. Furthermore, when displaying an operation prompt image corresponding to high reliability (high reliability of a jackpot or high expected success rate of the button preview effect) among multiple types of operation prompt images, the display range of the high-brightness image may be configured to be wider than when displaying an operation prompt image corresponding to low reliability. In this case, an operation prompt image corresponding to high reliability may be adopted that has a larger display size than an operation prompt image corresponding to low reliability, and a high-brightness image corresponding to the display size of the operation prompt image may be displayed within the display range of the high-brightness image, and the display size of the high-brightness image may be configured to differ depending on the reliability. Furthermore, when displaying an operation prompt image corresponding to high reliability, the high-brightness image may be displayed over a wider area than the display size of the operation prompt image, so that it overlaps with all or at least one of the design, button preview effect character image, background image, etc.

Furthermore, the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170e is configured to be minimum (e.g., 10%) at the start of display (Figure 26(a)) and gradually increase (rise) over time, for example, at a constant rate of change (transmittance change processing, transmittance change effect). In other words, the high-brightness effect WO31 is composed of a low-transmittance change effect that decreases the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170e, and a high-transmittance change effect that increases the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170e, with the latter (Figures 26(a)-(e)) having a longer execution time than the former (Figure 26(a)).

During the high-brightness effect WO31, the effect lamp L emits light in the first high-brightness medium light-emitting mode (here, blue) (Figures 26(a) to (d)). Note that the minimum transmittance of the high-brightness image 170e is greater than 0% (e.g., 10%). Even at the start of display when this minimum transmittance is reached (Figure 26(a)), the operation prompt image 176 is slightly visible, but the minimum transmittance of the high-brightness image 170e may be 0%. Also, only the size of the high-brightness image 170e may be changed while the transmittance remains constant, or only the transmittance may be changed while the size remains constant. The transmittance of the high-brightness image 170e may be non-uniform. The execution time of the high-transmittance change effect may be shorter than that of the low-transmittance change effect, or the execution times of both may be approximately the same.

When the high-brightness image 170e disappears and the high-brightness effect WO31 ends (FIG. 26(e)), the operation prompt image 176 is dynamically displayed to indicate that the effect button 34 is being pressed until the effect button 34 is operated and the valid operation period ends (FIG. 26(f)). During this time, the effect lamp L emits light in an operation-waiting light-emitting mode (here, flashing blue). The operation-waiting light-emitting mode of the effect lamp L may be turned off. Alternatively, some effect lamps may be flashing blue and others may be turned off, or some effect lamps may be turned off and others may be flashing blue. The valid operation period may start when the display of the operation prompt image 176 begins, i.e., when the high-brightness effect WO31 starts (FIG. 26(a)), or when the high-brightness image 170e disappears, i.e., when the high-brightness effect WO31 ends (FIG. 26(e)), or at any time in between.

Next, we will explain the details of the high-brightness effects WO32 and WO33. When the effect button 34 is operated during the valid operation period (Figure 26 (f)), the operation prompt effect BA1 transitions to the post-operation success effect BA2A, and the high-brightness effect WO32 is first performed (Figure 27 (a)). In this high-brightness effect (second range high-brightness effect) WO32, similar to high-brightness effect WO31, high-brightness image 170f is displayed in front of button preview effect image 173 and behind mini pattern 165, reserved base image 168, and the reserved images X1-X4, Y1-Y4 in front of them (Figure 27(a)), and the size and transmittance of this high-brightness image 170f gradually change and eventually disappear (Figure 27(d)), but the change in this high-brightness image 170f differs from high-brightness image 170e in high-brightness effect WO31 (Figures 26(a)-(e)).

That is, after the high-brightness image 170f starts to be displayed at a size (range) corresponding to the operation prompting image 176 (FIG. 27(a)), its size (range) gradually increases over time, reaching a maximum at a predetermined point (FIG. 27(b)), and then gradually decreases over time until it finally disappears (FIGS. 27(b)-(d)). In this way, the high-brightness effect WO32 is composed of an enlargement change effect that changes the size (range) of the high-brightness image 170f in an enlargement direction and a reduction change effect that changes the size (range) of the high-brightness image 170f in a reduction direction, with the latter (FIGS. 27(b)-(d)) taking longer to execute than the former (FIGS. 23(a)-(b)). Furthermore, the maximum range (second range) of the high-brightness image 170f in the high-brightness effect (second range high-brightness effect) WO32 is wider than the maximum range (first range) of the high-brightness image 170e in the high-brightness effect (first range high-brightness effect) WO31.

Furthermore, the high-brightness image 170f is configured, for example, so that its transmittance remains uniform and changes over time (transmittance change processing, transmittance change effect). The transmittance gradually decreases over time, reaching a minimum (lowest) at a predetermined point (Figures 27(a)-(b)), and then gradually increases over time (Figures 27(b)-(d)). That is, the high-brightness effect WO32 is configured with a low-transmittance change effect that decreases the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170f, and a high-transmittance change effect that increases the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170f, with the latter (Figures 27(b)-(d)) having a longer execution time than the former (Figures 27(a)-(b)). Note that while the minimum (lowest) transmittance of the high-brightness image 170f is set to be greater than 0% (e.g., 20%), it may also be 0%. Furthermore, only the size of the high-brightness image 170f may be changed while the transmittance remains constant, or only the transmittance may be changed while the size remains constant. The transmittance of the high-brightness image 170f may be non-uniform. The execution time of the high-transmittance change effect may be shorter than that of the low-transmittance change effect, or the execution times of both may be approximately the same.

The high-brightness effect WO31 and the high-brightness effect WO32 may be configured to have different minimum transmittance (transparency) for the high-brightness image, or different display ranges (transparency) for the high-brightness image. In this case, it is desirable that the minimum transmittance of the high-brightness image for the high-brightness effect WO32 be smaller than that for the high-brightness effect WO31, and that the display range of the high-brightness image for the high-brightness effect WO32 be larger than that for the high-brightness effect WO31. This makes it possible to execute different high-brightness effects before and after the display of the operation prompt image, or before and after the player operates the operation means, and further makes it possible to execute high-brightness effects with a greater impact when the operation is successful.

During the high-brightness effect WO32, the operation prompt image 176 is first erased behind the high-brightness image 170f (Fig. 27(a) → (b)), after which the character image 174 rotates with a serious expression and performs other predetermined actions (Fig. 27(b)-(d)). Also, during the high-brightness effect WO32, the effect lamp L emits light in the second high-brightness medium light-emitting mode (white in this case) (Fig. 26(a)-(c)). Then, after the high-brightness effect WO32 ends, the character image 174 expands and switches from a serious expression to a smiling expression (Fig. 27(d) → (e)), at which point the high-brightness effect WO33 is performed.

The high-brightness effect WO33 is intended to emphasize that the character image 174 has changed to a smiling face, and at the moment the character image 174 changes from a serious expression to a smiling face, a high-brightness image 170g corresponding to the display range of the character image 174 is displayed (Figure 27(e)). When the high-brightness effect WO33 ends with the disappearance of the high-brightness image 170g, the smiling character image 174 becomes fully visible (Figure 27(f)). In addition, the effect lamp L is temporarily turned off after the high-brightness effect WO32, and from high-brightness effect WO33 onwards, it emits light in a successful light-emitting mode (here, red) (Figures 27(d)-(f)).

Here, the minimum (lowest) transmittance of the high-brightness image 170g is greater than 0% (for example, 10%), but may be 0%. Also, the high-brightness image 170g has a uniform transmittance, but it may be non-uniform. The execution time of this high-brightness effect WO33 (the display time of the high-brightness image 170g) is shorter than the execution times of the high-brightness effects WO31 and WO32. Also, the maximum range (second range) of the high-brightness image 170g in the high-brightness effect WO33 is wider than the maximum range (first range) of the high-brightness image 170e in the high-brightness effect WO31.

As described above, high-brightness effects (second high-brightness effects) WO32 and WO33 are performed based on the operation of effect button 34, and while the high-brightness effects WO32 and WO33 are being performed, a post-operation success effect (post-operation effect) BA2A is executed.

As explained above, button preview performance 1 can execute a high-brightness performance (first range high-brightness performance) WO31 that displays a high-brightness image 170e in a first range, and a high-brightness performance (second range high-brightness performance) WO32 that displays a high-brightness image 170f in a second range wider than the first range. It can also execute an operation prompt performance that displays an operation prompt image 176 that prompts the user to operate the performance button (operation means) 34, and a post-operation performance that is performed after the performance button 34 is operated. It can also execute high-brightness performance WO31 while the operation prompt performance is being executed, high-brightness performance WO32 when the performance button 34 is operated, and a post-operation performance while high-brightness performance WO32 is being executed. The high-brightness image displayed in front of the operation prompt image 176 and the high-brightness image displayed in front of the character image 174 may be configured to have different transmittances. In this case, the high-brightness image displayed in front of the operation prompting image 176 may be configured to have a lower transmittance, and the high-brightness image displayed in front of the character image 174 may be configured to have a higher transmittance, or vice versa.

The various configurations in the above-mentioned button preview performance 1 are not limited to use in this button preview performance 1, but can also be used in various other performances (preview performances and partial performances). For example, the various configurations of the high-brightness performances WO31, WO32, WO33, etc. in the button preview performance 1 may also be used in the step-up preview performance, reach preview performance, dialogue preview performance described below, etc.

[Dialogue preview 1]
28 to 32 show an example of a line preview effect 1 executed during a normal fluctuation in a reach fluctuation pattern or a normal fluctuation pattern, or during a reach fluctuation in a reach fluctuation pattern. This line preview effect 1 is an effect in which a character speaks a line, and as shown in FIG. 28, the line preview effect 1 is controlled so that the reliability of a jackpot varies depending on the type of line, the type of character, the display mode of the line text, and the like. In the line preview effect 1 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28, there are provided six different performance modes with different combinations of five types of lines L1 to L5 ( FIG. 28(b) ) - "I feel a curse,""Here's the key to breaking the curse,""Thisis...,""I drew a fortune and it was a great fortune," and "I feel great," and two types of characters C1 and C2 ( FIG. 28(c) ), a boy and a girl. The high and low reliability of a jackpot for these six performance modes is set as shown in FIG. 28(a). The dialogue characters corresponding to the dialogues L1 to L5 are displayed in different display modes (here, display colors), and the respective display colors are "blue,""red,""gold,""dangercolor," and "rainbow color" (Figure 28(b)).

Note that characters C1 and C2 may have the same number of presentation modes (for example, six), or the number of presentation modes may differ for each character, such as L3 to L5 for character C1 and L1 to L5 for character C2. Multiple presentation modes may also be provided for a single display mode for a string of characters (for example, red), in which case the number of presentation modes for a single display mode for a string of characters (for example, red) may differ for each character. That is, for example, there may be two presentation modes for character C1 when the text color is red, and one for character C2. When multiple presentation modes are provided for a single display mode for a string of characters (for example, display color), it is desirable to have different lines for each presentation mode.

Next, a specific example of the dialogue preview performance 1 will be described using the example where dialogue L5 and character C1 are selected. First, an overview will be provided with reference to Figure 29. When dialogue preview performance 1 begins during a normal fluctuation in a reach fluctuation pattern or a normal fluctuation pattern (or during a reach fluctuation in a reach fluctuation pattern), BGM 4 related to dialogue preview performance 1 begins to be output from speakers 18, 25 as background music. Meanwhile, decorative pattern 164 disappears from display screen 58a, with reserved pedestal image 168 displayed at the bottom and miniature pattern 165 displayed at the top. Behind these, for example, a dialogue preview performance image 181a related to dialogue first half performance SA1, in which two characters C1 and C2 appear together, is displayed (Figure 29(a)). Furthermore, during dialogue first half performance SA1, at least a portion of performance lamps L (here, both frame-side lamp La and board-side lamp Lb) emit light in a dialogue first half illumination mode, for example, white.

Then, the dialogue preview performance image 181a (Figure 29(a)) transitions from the first half of the dialogue performance SA1 to the second half of the dialogue performance SA2, and the dialogue preview performance image 181b (Figure 29(c)) for the second half of the dialogue performance SA2 is switched via the high-brightness performance WO41 (Figure 29(b)). At least a portion of the performance lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) are switched from the first half of the dialogue illumination mode (here, white) to the second half of the dialogue illumination mode (here, orange). Here, the high-brightness performance WO41 displays the high-brightness image 170h, thereby reducing the visibility of the image behind the high-brightness image 170h (here, the dialogue preview performance images 181a and 181b). Note that in the dialogue preview performance image 181b, only one of the selected characters C1 or C2 (here, the boy character C1) is displayed.

During high-brightness effect WO41 (Figure 29(b)), BGM4 related to the dialogue preview effect continues to be output, and as sound effects, a high-brightness first half emphasis sound is output in the first half when the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170h decreases, and a high-brightness second half emphasis sound is output in the second half when the transmittance increases.

When the high-brightness effect WO41 (Figure 29(b)) ends and the dialogue preview effect image 181b (Figure 29(c)) becomes fully visible (Figure 29(c)), a dialogue image 182 is additionally displayed on the dialogue preview effect image 181b (Figure 29(d)). Here, the dialogue image 182 is composed of a speech bubble image 182a and dialogue text 182b displayed within the speech bubble image 182a. Here, the dialogue text 182b is composed of the string "I feel great."

Then, at a predetermined point after the dialogue image 182 starts to be displayed, the dialogue output effect is initiated, and the voice preview of "I feel great" corresponding to the dialogue text 182b displayed on the screen is output, and a high-brightness effect WO42 is performed corresponding to the range of the dialogue image 182 in the dialogue preview effect image 181b (Figure 29(e)). In this high-brightness effect WO42, the high-brightness image 170i moves over the dialogue image 182 in accordance with the progress of the dialogue output, for example, at a timing preceding the progress of the dialogue output, thereby temporarily reducing the visibility of the image behind the high-brightness image 170i (here, the dialogue text 182b).

Furthermore, after the dialogue image 182 starts to be displayed, at least some of the effect lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) emit light in a dialogue output light-emitting mode. The dialogue output light-emitting mode is a cyclical change mode that cyclically changes between multiple colors (here, orange and white) including, for example, the light-emitting color of the previous dialogue second-half light-emitting mode.

Next, we will provide a more detailed explanation of the dialogue preview effect shown in Figure 29, focusing on the high-brightness effects WO41 and WO42. Figures 30 to 32 show the changes in the display screen and light-emitting means over the entire period of Figures 29(a) to (e) at even shorter time intervals than Figure 29. Note that in Figures 30 to 32, the time interval between adjacent frames is the same, A milliseconds, the same as in Figures 16 to 18 for the step-up preview effect.

First, we will explain the details of the high-brightness effect WO41. In the high-brightness effect WO41 shown in Figures 30(a) to 31(r), when the dialogue preview effect image 181a is switched to the dialogue preview effect image 181b, the high-brightness image 170h is displayed in front of the dialogue preview effect images 181a and 181b, and behind the mini pattern 165, the reserved base image 168, and the reserved images X1 to X4 and Y1 to Y4 in front of them.

Here, the high-brightness image 170h is displayed in a range (size) that covers the entire dialogue preview effect images 181a and 181b, and the transmittance is uniform within that display range; the display range does not change over time, but the transmittance changes over time (transmittance change processing, transmittance change effect). The transmittance of the high-brightness image 170h is configured to gradually decrease over time, for example, from 100% to 0% (Figures 30(a)-(i)), and then gradually increase over time, for example, from 0% to 100% (Figures 31(j)-(r)). Furthermore, during the first half of the period when the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170h decreases, the effect lamp L emits light in the dialogue first half illumination mode (here, white) (Figures 30(a)-(i)). During the second half of the period when the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170h increases, the effect lamp L emits light in the dialogue second half illumination mode (here, orange) (Figures 31(j)-(r)). The first half of the dialogue and the second half of the dialogue may be configured to emit a common light (e.g., white).

When the transmittance of high-brightness image 170h reaches 0% and the image behind it becomes completely invisible (Figures 30(i) and 31(j)), dialogue preview effect image 181a is switched to dialogue preview effect image 181b. In this way, high-brightness effect WO41 is configured to display high-brightness image 170h in front of the effect image when it changes. Furthermore, when executed during a reach effect, it may be configured to display a high-brightness image in front of it when it switches from reach effect to special reach effect.

Furthermore, during the first half of the high-brightness effect WO41, when the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170h decreases, the transmittance values of the high-brightness image 170h in each frame of Figures 30(a)-(i) gradually increase, from 100% to 95% to 88% to 79% to 68% to 55% to 40% to 23% to 0%, respectively. That is, if the rate of change in the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170h during the period from Figure 30(a) to (e) (first transmittance change effect) is designated as the first change rate and the first change amount, and the rate of change in the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170h during the subsequent period from Figure 30(e) to (i) (second transmittance change effect) is designated as the second change rate and the second change amount, the second change rate is greater than the first change rate, and the second change amount is greater than the first change amount. In this way, gradually increasing the rate and amount of change in transmittance prevents the transmittance change effect from becoming monotonous. Furthermore, by gradually increasing the rate and amount of change in transmittance towards the latter half of the game, it is possible to transition to a low transmittance state relatively smoothly and in a short period of time after the player has grasped that the transmittance change effect has begun. However, this is not limited to this, and the rate and amount of change in transmittance may also be gradually decreased. In this case, because the rate and amount of change decrease towards the latter half of the game, it is possible to execute a transmittance change effect that leaves a more lingering impression towards the latter half of the game, prevent the transmittance change effect from becoming monotonous, and enhance the effect of the effect.

Furthermore, during the latter half of the high-brightness effect WO41, when the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170h increases, the transmittance values of the high-brightness image 170h in each frame of Figures 31(j) to (r) gradually decrease, from 0% to 23% to 40% to 55% to 68% to 79% to 88% to 95% to 100%, respectively. That is, if the rate of change in the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170h during the period from Figure 31(j) to (n) (second transmittance change effect) is defined as the second change rate and the second change amount, and the rate of change in the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170h during the subsequent period from Figure 31(n) to (r) (first transmittance change effect) is defined as the first change rate and the first change amount, the second change rate is greater than the first change rate, and the second change amount is greater than the first change amount. It is also possible to configure the rate and amount of change in transmittance to gradually increase. This prevents the transmittance change effect from becoming monotonous. Also, by gradually increasing the rate and amount of change in transmittance towards the latter half of the game, it is possible to transition to a low transmittance state relatively smoothly and in a short amount of time after the player has grasped that the transmittance change effect has begun.

The second rate and second amount of change in the second transmittance change effect may be configured to be smaller than the first rate and first amount of change in the first transmittance change effect, or they may be configured to be approximately the same. Furthermore, whether the first transmittance change effect and the second transmittance change effect are configured to have a larger rate and amount of change in transmittance, or a smaller rate and amount of change in transmittance, it is desirable to configure the first rate and second rate of change, and the first amount and second amount of change to be different. Even in this case, the second rate and second amount of change may be configured to be larger or smaller than the first rate and first amount of change. By making the first rate and second rate of change, and the first amount and second amount of change different in this way, a wide variety of transmittance change effects can be produced, improving the presentation effect.

Note that while the high-brightness effect WO41 is being executed, the mini-pattern 165 cycles from "8, 2, 4" (Figure 30(a)) multiple times to reach the position between "2, 4, 6" and "3, 5, 7" (Figure 31(r)). In other words, the execution time of the high-brightness effect WO41 (Figures 30(a) to 31(r)) is longer than the period it takes for the mini-pattern 165 to cycle through one cycle.

Next, the details of the high-brightness effect WO42 will be explained. When the high-brightness effect WO41 ends and the dialogue preview effect image 181b becomes fully visible (Figure 31(r)), a dialogue image 182 consisting of a speech bubble image 182a and dialogue text 182b is additionally displayed on the dialogue preview effect image 181b (Figure 32(s)). At the same time, a dialogue sound (preview voice) of "I feel great" corresponding to the dialogue text 182b is output. In response to the output of this dialogue sound, the high-brightness effect WO42 (Figures 32(s)-(w)) is performed. Here, the high-brightness effect WO42 displays a high-brightness image in front of the dialogue text in the order in which it is arranged. However, this is not limited to this, and a high-brightness image may be displayed in front of all of the dialogue text. In addition, in this case, the high-brightness image does not have to be displayed in front in a way that completely covers all of the serif characters; as long as it covers almost all of the serif characters, some of the serif characters may be visible (or easily visible) without overlapping with the high-brightness image.

The reliability of the dialogue characters 182b varies depending on their type and display mode (display color) (Figures 28(a) and (b)), and they are an example of specific character information to which reliability information consisting of a display mode corresponding to the reliability of the jackpot (reliability of the occurrence of a specified event) is added. During the high-brightness effect WO42, the effect lamp L emits light in a dialogue output light-emitting mode (here, a cyclical change mode between orange and white) (Figures 32(s) to (w)). Different dialogue output light-emitting modes may be executed depending on the type of character selected. A common dialogue output light-emitting mode may also be executed regardless of the selected character. A dialogue output light-emitting mode corresponding to the display color of the dialogue characters may also be executed.

The high-brightness image 170i used in the high-brightness effect WO42 is approximately the size of one character of the dialogue character 182b, and its transparency is set, for example, to a uniform value greater than 0% (e.g., 20%). It moves across the dialogue image 182 in accordance with the progress of the dialogue output, for example, at a timing preceding the progress of the dialogue output (Figures 32(s)-(w)). Because the transparency of the high-brightness image 170i is greater than 0% (e.g., 20%), the characters behind the high-brightness image 170i are also visible. However, a high-brightness image with a lower transparency may be displayed so that the characters behind are not visible. In this way, the high-brightness effect WO42 is configured to display the high-brightness image 170i in accordance with the display area of the dialogue character (specific character information) 182b. Additionally, the dialogue characters 182b may be displayed sequentially from the beginning in accordance with the dialogue output, preceding the dialogue characters 182b, and the high-brightness image 170i may be displayed and moved in accordance with the display of the dialogue characters 182b.

Note that while the high-brightness effect WO42 is being executed, the mini-pattern 165 completes a cycle from "5, 7, 1" (Figure 32 (s)) to "7, 1, 3" (Figure 32 (w)). In other words, the execution time of the high-brightness effect WO42 (Figure 32 (s) to (w)) is longer than the period it takes for the mini-pattern 165 to complete a cycle.

As described above, in dialogue preview performance 1, for example, if the rate of change in transmittance of high-brightness image 170h during the period from (a) to (e) in Figure 30 (first transmittance change performance) is designated as the first change rate and the amount of change is designated as the first change amount, and the rate of change in transmittance of high-brightness image 170h during the subsequent period from (e) to (i) in Figure 30 (second transmittance change performance) is designated as the second change rate and the amount of change is designated as the second change amount, the second change rate is greater than the first change rate, and the second change amount is greater than the first change amount. In this way, when the transmittance of high-brightness image 170h is to be reduced, the second transmittance change performance is executed after the first transmittance change performance is executed. Furthermore, for example, if the rate of change in transmittance of high-brightness image 170h during the period from (j) to (n) in Figure 31 (second transmittance change performance) is defined as the second change rate and the amount of change is defined as the second change amount, and if the rate of change in transmittance of high-brightness image 170h during the subsequent period from (n) to (r) in Figure 31 (first transmittance change performance) is defined as the first change rate and the first change amount, then the second change rate is greater than the first change rate, and the second change amount is greater than the first change amount. In this way, when increasing the transmittance of high-brightness image 170h, the first transmittance change performance is executed after the second transmittance change performance is executed.

In addition, dialogue preview performance 1 includes a high-brightness performance (high-brightness performance when image is changed) WO41 that can be executed when an image change process is performed to change the dialogue preview performance image (predetermined image), and a high-brightness performance (high-brightness performance when image is not changed) WO42 that can be executed when the dialogue preview performance image (predetermined image) is not changed (image change process is not performed).The execution time of high-brightness performance WO41 is longer than that of high-brightness performance WO42, and the execution time of high-brightness performance WO41 is longer than the cycle of mini-pattern 165 variation.Incidentally, the execution time of high-brightness performance WO42 is also longer than the cycle of mini-pattern 165 variation, but it may be shorter than the cycle of mini-pattern 165 variation.

Furthermore, the minimum transmittance of the high-brightness image differs between high-brightness effect WO41 (high-brightness effect when image is changed) and high-brightness effect WO42 (high-brightness effect when image is not changed). That is, high-brightness image 170h in high-brightness effect WO41 has a minimum transmittance of 0%, whereas high-brightness image 170i in high-brightness effect WO42 has a minimum transmittance greater than 0%, meaning that high-brightness image 170i in high-brightness effect WO42 has a higher minimum transmittance than high-brightness image 170h in high-brightness effect WO41. Note that the minimum transmittance of high-brightness image 170i in high-brightness effect WO42 may be smaller than that of high-brightness image 170h in high-brightness effect WO41, or may be approximately the same.

The various configurations of the dialogue preview performance 1 described above are not limited to this dialogue preview performance and can be similarly employed in various other performances (preview performances and partial performances). For example, the various configurations of the high-brightness performances WO41 and WO42, dialogue output performances, etc., in the dialogue preview performance 1 may be employed in the step-up preview performance, reach preview performance, etc., described above, the pseudo-consecutive preview performance, button preview performance 2, etc., described below. A dialogue preview performance by a character may be executed before the high-brightness performance WO41. In this case, it is desirable that the dialogue preview performance is a dialogue preview performance that does not include any indication of reliability. Furthermore, while the dialogue preview performance may include an indication of reliability, it is desirable that the indication of reliability be lower than that of the dialogue preview performance (Figures 32(s) to (w)) executed after the high-brightness performance WO41. The dialogue preview performance may also be in a form that suggests the content to be executed in the dialogue preview performance (Figures 32(s) to (w)). Additionally, a dialogue preview effect may be configured to be executed during the period when the transmittance of the high-brightness image decreases during the high-brightness effect WO41, for example, the period shown in Figures 31(k) to (r). It is desirable that the dialogue preview effect at this time be a dialogue preview effect that does not include any indication of reliability. Furthermore, the dialogue preview effect at this time may include an indication of reliability, but it is desirable that the indication of reliability be lower than that of the dialogue preview effect (Figures 32(s) to (w)) executed after the high-brightness effect WO41, and the dialogue preview effect may be in a form that suggests the content that will be executed in the dialogue preview effect (Figures 32(s) to (w)).

[Pseudo consecutive announcement performance]
33 to 35 show an example of a pseudo consecutive announcement effect executed during normal fluctuation in a normal fluctuation pattern. The pseudo consecutive announcement effect is an effect in which pseudo pattern fluctuations by the decorative pattern 164 are executed multiple times while the first and second special patterns fluctuate once, and when a pseudo consecutive display appears in the fluctuation of the decorative pattern 164 (for example, when the middle decorative pattern 164c stops at a predetermined pseudo consecutive pattern such as "@"), a new pseudo pattern fluctuation is started, and it is set so that the more the number of pseudo pattern fluctuations (the number of pseudo consecutive times), the higher the reliability of a jackpot.

Specific examples of the pseudo consecutive win preview effect will be explained below, taking the cases where the first and second pseudo symbol changes are performed as examples, but first an overview will be provided with reference to Figure 33. When the pseudo consecutive win preview effect is executed, for example, during normal changes in a reach change pattern or normal change pattern, BGM 5 related to the first pseudo symbol change is output as background music from speakers 18, 25, and on display screen 58a, for example, decorative symbol 164 is hidden, with reserved base image 168 displayed at the bottom and mini symbol 165 displayed at the top, and behind them, a first pseudo consecutive win first half effect image 191a related to the first half effect of the first pseudo symbol change (first pseudo consecutive win first half effect PF1A) is displayed (Figure 33(a)).

The first pseudo consecutive first half performance image 191a includes a character image 192a of an arbitrary character (here, a kappa), and is expressed in colors based on the first display color (here, blue) corresponding to the first pseudo pattern change. During the first pseudo consecutive first half performance PF1A, at least a portion of the performance lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) emit light in a first pseudo consecutive first half light-emitting pattern corresponding to the first display color, in this case, blue.

Then, the first pseudo consecutive first half performance image 191a is switched to the first pseudo consecutive second half performance image 194a, resulting in a transition from the first pseudo consecutive first half performance PF1A (Figure 33(a)) to the first pseudo consecutive second half performance PF1B (Figure 33(c)), and during this transition, a high-brightness performance WO51 (Figure 33(b)) is performed. That is, a first transition area 195a of any shape, for example, a rectangular shape, is displayed in front of the first pseudo consecutive first half performance image 191a, and a portion of the first pseudo consecutive second half performance image 194a is displayed within that first transition area 195a. In the high-brightness performance WO51, a high-brightness image 170j is displayed in the first transition area (first area) 195a, thereby reducing the visibility of the image behind the high-brightness image 170j (here, the first pseudo consecutive second half performance image 194a). Furthermore, during this high-brightness effect WO51, a text image 193a consisting of an arbitrary string of characters (here, "At first...") is displayed on the screen, for example, outside the first transition area 195a.

During the high-brightness effect WO51 (Figure 33 (b)), the output of BGM5 related to the first pseudo-pattern change continues, and a first pseudo-consecutive high-brightness emphasis sound is output as a sound effect. Also, during the high-brightness effect WO51, at least a portion of the effect lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) emit light in a first pseudo-consecutive high-brightness light-emitting mode (e.g., flashing blue) corresponding to the first display color, for example.

When the high-brightness image 170j disappears, the high-brightness effect WO51 (Figure 33(b)) ends, and the first pseudo-consecutive second-half effect image 194a in the first transition area 195a becomes fully visible, the first transition area 195a expands to fill the entire screen, and the entire first pseudo-consecutive second-half effect image 194a becomes visible (Figure 33(c)). Note that the first pseudo-consecutive second-half effect image 194a includes a character image 196a, which uses the same type of character as character image 192a and is displayed larger than character image 192a.

Then, the screen transitions to the decorative pattern 164 pattern change screen, and the transition to the second pseudo pattern change is confirmed when the middle decorative pattern 164c stops at the pseudo consecutive pattern "@" (the pseudo consecutive display appears) (Figure 33 (d)). While the pattern change screen is displayed, for example, the output of background music is stopped, and a pattern stop sound is output as a sound effect in sync with the stopping of decorative patterns 164a to 164c.

During the second pseudo symbol change, BGM 6 related to the second pseudo symbol change is output from speakers 18, 25 as background music, and on display screen 58a, for example, decorative symbol 164 is hidden, with reserved base image 168 displayed at the bottom and mini symbol 165 displayed at the top, and behind these, second pseudo consecutive first half performance image 191b related to the first half performance of the second pseudo symbol change (second pseudo consecutive first half performance PF2A) is displayed (Figure 33 (e)).

The second pseudo-continuous first half performance image 191b includes a character image 192b of an arbitrary character (here, the same kappa as the first pseudo-continuous first half performance image 191a), and is rendered in a color based on the second display color (here, red) corresponding to the second pseudo pattern change. During the second pseudo-continuous first half performance PF2A, at least a portion of the performance lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) emit light in the second pseudo-continuous first half light-emitting mode corresponding to the second display color, here red. In this embodiment, character image 192a and character image 192b are substantially the same image with different base colors.

Then, the second pseudo-continuous first half performance image 191b is switched to the second pseudo-continuous second half performance image 194b, resulting in a transition from the second pseudo-continuous first half performance PF2A (Figure 33(e)) to the second pseudo-continuous second half performance PF2B (Figure 33(g)), and during this transition, a high-brightness performance WO52 (Figure 33(f)) is performed. That is, a second transition area 195b of any shape, for example, a rectangle, is displayed in front of the second pseudo-continuous first half performance image 191b, and a portion of the second pseudo-continuous second half performance image 194b is displayed within that second transition area 195b. In the high-brightness performance WO52, a high-brightness image 170k is displayed in the second transition area (second area) 195b, thereby reducing the visibility of the image behind the high-brightness image 170k (here, the second pseudo-continuous second half performance image 194b). Furthermore, during the high-brightness effect WO51, a character image 193b consisting of an arbitrary character string (here, "This time...") is displayed on the screen, for example, inside the second transition area 195b. Note that the second transition area 195b is formed to be larger than the first transition area 195a. During the high-brightness effect WO52, the character image consisting of the character string may also be configured to be displayed outside the second transition area 195b.

During the high-brightness effect WO52 (Figure 33 (f)), the output of BGM 6 related to the second pseudo symbol change continues, and a second pseudo-continuous high-brightness emphasis sound is output as a sound effect. Here, it is desirable that the first pseudo-continuous high-brightness emphasis sound and the second pseudo-continuous high-brightness emphasis sound are different emphasis sounds. If different emphasis sounds are used, it is desirable that the second pseudo-continuous high-brightness emphasis sound be louder or more flashy than the first pseudo-continuous high-brightness emphasis sound. Furthermore, in order to reduce audio data, the first pseudo-continuous high-brightness emphasis sound and the second pseudo-continuous high-brightness emphasis sound may be a common emphasis sound. Furthermore, during the high-brightness effect WO52, at least a portion of the effect lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) emit light in a second pseudo-continuous high-brightness light-emitting mode (e.g., flashing red) corresponding to the second display color, for example.

When the high-brightness image 170k disappears, the high-brightness effect WO52 (Figure 33(f)) ends, and the second pseudo-consecutive second-half effect image 194b in the second transition area 195b becomes fully visible. The second transition area 195b expands to fill the entire screen, making the entire second pseudo-consecutive second-half effect image 194b visible (Figure 33(g)). The second pseudo-consecutive second-half effect image 194b includes a character image 196b, which uses the same type of character as character image 192b and is displayed larger than character image 192b. In this embodiment, character image 196b and character image 196a use substantially the same image (excluding the base color), but character image 196b is displayed larger than character image 196a. However, this is not a limitation, and character images 196a and 196b may be displayed the same size.

Then, the screen transitions to the decorative pattern 164 pattern change screen, and the transition to the third pseudo pattern change is confirmed when the middle decorative pattern 164c stops at the pseudo consecutive pattern "@" (the pseudo consecutive display appears) (Figure 33 (h)). While the pattern change screen is displayed, for example, the output of background music is stopped, and a pattern stop sound is output as a sound effect in sync with the stopping of decorative patterns 164a to 164c.

Next, we will provide a more detailed explanation of the pseudo consecutive preview performance shown in Figure 33, focusing on the performance period centered on the high-brightness performances WO51 and WO52. Figure 34 shows the changes in the display screen and light-emitting means for the periods (a) to (c) of Figure 33, and Figure 35 shows the changes for the periods (e) to (g) of Figure 33, each at even shorter time intervals than Figure 33. Note that in Figures 34 and 35, the time interval between adjacent frames is the same, A milliseconds, the same as in Figures 16 to 18 for the step-up preview performance.

First, the details of the high-brightness effect WO51 will be explained. In the high-brightness effect WO51, a first transition area 195a of any shape (here, rectangular) is first displayed in front of the first pseudo-consecutive first half effect image 191a after a predetermined display start operation, in this case an expansion operation centered on a predetermined point on the screen (Figures 34(a)-(c)). A text image 193a consisting of an arbitrary character string (here, "At first...") is also displayed outside the first transition area 195a. Note that a portion of the first pseudo-consecutive second half effect image 194a is displayed within this first transition area 195a from the start of its display. However, a high-brightness image 170j is also displayed superimposed in front of the first pseudo-consecutive second half effect image 194a within the first transition area 195a, and the visibility of the first pseudo-consecutive second half effect image 194a is reduced by the high-brightness image 170j.

In this embodiment, the size (range) of the high-brightness image 170j corresponds to the entire display range of the first transition area 195a, has a uniform transmittance, and has a transmittance of 0% at the start of display of the first transition area 195a. Therefore, at the start of display of the first transition area 195a (Figures 34 (b)-(c)), the first pseudo-consecutive second half performance image 194a inside it is not visible. Of course, the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170j at the start of display of the first transition area 195a may be greater than 0%.

Once the first transition area 195a is displayed at a predetermined size after a predetermined display start operation (FIG. 34(c)), the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170j gradually increases over time (transmittance change processing, transmittance change effect), and accordingly, the visibility of the first pseudo-consecutive second-half effect image 194a within the first transition area 195a gradually increases (FIGS. 34(c)-(g)). Then, when the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170j reaches 100%, the high-brightness image 170j disappears, and the high-brightness effect WO51 ends (FIG. 34(g)), the first transition area 195a expands to cover the entire screen, the character image 193a is erased from the screen, and the first pseudo-consecutive first-half effect image 191a is completely replaced by the first pseudo-consecutive second-half effect image 194a (FIGS. 34(g)-(i)). During the high-brightness effect WO51, the effect lamp L emits light in a first pseudo-consecutive high-brightness light-emitting mode (e.g., flashing blue) corresponding to the first display color (here, blue).

Next, the details of the high-brightness effect WO52 will be explained. In the high-brightness effect WO52, a second transition area 195b of an arbitrary shape (here, rectangular) is first displayed in front of the second pseudo-consecutive first half effect image 191b after a predetermined display start operation, in this case, an expansion operation centered on a predetermined point on the screen (FIGS. 35(a)-(c)). At the same time, a character image 193b consisting of an arbitrary character string (here, "This time...") is displayed, for example, in a position corresponding to the inside of the second transition area 195b. Note that a portion of the second pseudo-consecutive second half effect image 194b is displayed within this second transition area 195b from the start of its display. However, a high-brightness image 170k is also displayed in front of the second pseudo-consecutive second half effect image 194b within the second transition area 195b, and the visibility of the second pseudo-consecutive second half effect image 194b is reduced by the high-brightness image 170k.

In this embodiment, the size (range) of the high-brightness image 170k corresponds to the entire display range of the second transition area 195b, has a uniform transmittance, and is 0% transmittance at the start of display of the second transition area 195b. Therefore, the second pseudo-consecutive second half performance image 194b is not visible at the start of display of the second transition area 195b. Of course, the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170k at the start of display of the second transition area 195b may be greater than 0%. Note that the size of the second transition area (second area) 195b after the specified display start operation is wider than the first transition area (first area) 195a.

When the first transition area 195a is displayed at a predetermined size after a predetermined display start operation (Fig. 35(c)), the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170k gradually increases over time (transmittance change processing, transmittance change effect), and accordingly, the visibility of the second pseudo-consecutive second half effect image 194b gradually increases within the second transition area 195b (Figs. 35(c)-(g)). Then, when the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170k reaches 100%, the high-brightness image 170k disappears, and the high-brightness effect WO52 ends (Fig. 35(g)), the second transition area 195b expands to cover the entire screen, the character image 193b is erased from the screen, and the second pseudo-consecutive first half effect image 191b is completely replaced by the second pseudo-consecutive second half effect image 194b. During the high-brightness effect WO52, the effect lamp L emits light in a second pseudo-consecutive high-brightness light-emitting mode (for example, flashing red) that corresponds to the second display color (here, red). Note that the pseudo-consecutive effects of Figures 33(a) to (d) and 33(e) to (h) may be configured to execute a common lamp effect.

As explained above, the pseudo consecutive prediction effect can execute a high-brightness effect (specific first high-brightness effect) WO51 in which a high-brightness image (specific first high-brightness image) 170j is displayed in the first transition area (first area) 195a so that the visibility of the character image (first character image) 196a changes, and a high-brightness effect (specific second high-brightness effect) WO52 in which a high-brightness image (specific second high-brightness image) 170k is displayed in the second transition area (second area) 195b so that the visibility of the character image (second character image) 196b changes, with the second transition area (second area) 195b being wider than the first transition area (first area) 195a and the character image (second character image) 196b being displayed larger than the character image (first character image) 196a.

A high-brightness image may be displayed in front of the pseudo-consecutive symbol (here, "@"). By displaying a high-brightness image in front of the pseudo-consecutive symbol "@" when it is displayed in a static state, the visibility of the pseudo-consecutive symbol "@" before it is displayed in a static state may be reduced. Also, different high-brightness images may be displayed for the pseudo-consecutive symbol "@" displayed at the timing shown in Figure 33(d) and the pseudo-consecutive symbol "@" displayed at the timing shown in Figure 33(h). Alternatively, a high-brightness image may not be displayed at the timing shown in Figure 33(d) but may be displayed at the timing shown in Figure 33(h), or vice versa. A high-brightness image may be displayed in front of the pseudo-consecutive symbol "@" only when the pseudo-consecutive symbol "@" is displayed in a static state, thereby continuing the pseudo-consecutive effect. Furthermore, if the pseudo consecutive symbol "@" is not displayed (pseudo consecutive symbol failure), the high-brightness image may not be displayed before the pseudo consecutive symbol "@". In these cases, the display position of the high-brightness image is not limited to before the pseudo consecutive symbol "@", and the high-brightness effect may be executed at least before and after the timing when the pseudo consecutive symbol "@" is displayed. Furthermore, even when a high-brightness image is displayed when the pseudo consecutive symbol "@" is displayed, the high-brightness effect may be executed on the character image before the pseudo consecutive symbol "@" is displayed. In this case, the high-brightness effect may not be executed on the character image. Furthermore, when a high-brightness effect is displayed when the pseudo consecutive symbol "@" is displayed, the high-brightness effect may be different from the high-brightness effect on the character image, or a common high-brightness effect may be executed.

The various configurations of the pseudo consecutive win preview effect described above are not limited to this pseudo consecutive win preview effect, but can also be used in various other effects (preview effects and partial effects). For example, various configurations of the high-brightness effects WO51 and WO52 in the pseudo consecutive win preview effect may be used in the step-up preview effect, reach preview effect, button preview effect 2, etc., described below. Also, the pseudo consecutive win effects of Figures 33(a)-(d) may not use high-brightness effects, but the pseudo consecutive win effects of Figures 33(e)-(h) may use high-brightness effects. In this case, it is desirable to configure the pseudo consecutive win effects of Figures 33(e)-(h) so that the pseudo consecutive win success rate is higher than that of the pseudo consecutive win effects of Figures 33(a)-(d), but the opposite relationship may also be achieved. In this way, when there are multiple pseudo consecutive win effects, they may be configured so that some with high-brightness effects and some without high-brightness effects are executable.

[Button Preview 2]
36 to 39 show an example of a button preview effect 2 that is executed during a normal fluctuation in a reach fluctuation pattern or a normal fluctuation pattern, or during a reach fluctuation in a reach fluctuation pattern. Like button preview effect 1, this button preview effect (operation means) 2 is an effect that requires the player to operate the effect button (operation means) 34 (related to the player's operation of the operation means), and suggests the reliability of a jackpot, etc., by executing a predetermined post-operation effect based on the establishment of one or more conditions, including the operation of the effect button 34 during the valid operation period. There are multiple types of post-operation effects, for example, two types: a post-operation success effect and a post-operation failure effect, and the reliability of a jackpot is higher for a post-operation success effect than for a post-operation failure effect.

Next, a specific example of this button preview effect 2 will be explained using the case where the post-operation success effect is selected as the post-operation effect, but first an overview will be provided with reference to Figure 36. When button preview effect 2 starts during a normal fluctuation in a reach fluctuation pattern or a normal fluctuation pattern (or during a reach fluctuation in a reach fluctuation pattern), BGM 7 related to this button preview effect 1 starts to be output from speakers 18, 25 as background music, and button introduction effect BB0 starts.

In button introduction effect BB0, the decorative symbol 164 is hidden, and the reserved base image 168 is displayed at the bottom, while the mini symbol 165 is displayed at the top. Behind these, a button introduction effect image 202 is displayed, including a text image 201 such as "Defeat the monster!" (Figure 36(a)). Seeing this, a player can recognize that this effect suggests the possibility of a jackpot depending on whether or not the player can defeat the monster. Then, after a high-brightness effect WO61 that displays a high-brightness image 170l in front of the button introduction effect image 202, a monster character image 203a is added to the button introduction effect image 202 (Figures 36(b)-(c)). An effect image (specific image) 204 is superimposed on top of this character image 203a. This effect image 204 is composed of so-called "converging lines" that are displayed radially from the inside to the outside of the screen, for example.

Furthermore, at the start of this button introduction effect BB0 (Figs. 36(a)-(c)), for example, a predetermined introductory sound is output as a sound effect from speakers 18, 25, and a line corresponding to character string image 201, i.e., the button introduction voice "Defeat the monster," is output. At the start of high-brightness effect WO61, a first emphasis sound is output as a sound effect. Furthermore, at least a portion of the effect lamps L (here, both frame-side lamps La and board-side lamps Lb) emit light in an introduction light-emitting mode corresponding to button introduction effect BB0, for example, green, at the start of button introduction effect BB0 (Fig. 36(a)), and emit light in a first high-brightness medium light-emitting mode, for example, white, during high-brightness effect WO61 (Figs. 36(b)-(c)).

Following the button introduction effect BB0, a button promotion effect BB1 is performed (Figure 36 (d)). This button promotion effect BB1 is a switching display effect that rapidly switches between a first promotion image (individual image) 205a having a monster character image 203a and a second promotion image (individual image) 205b having a kappa character image 203b facing off against the monster. A text image 201 such as "Defeat the monster!" and an effect image 204 are displayed in front of the first promotion image 205a and second promotion image 205b. Note that the first promotion image 205a, second promotion image 205b, text image 201, and effect image 204 are displayed behind the reserved base image 168 and mini-pattern 165, just like the button introduction effect image 202.

The multiple characters that appear in this button-teasing performance BB1 include "ally characters" whose victory suggests that the player will be at an advantage, and "enemy characters" whose victory suggests that the player will be at a disadvantage. In this button-teasing performance BB1, the monster character image 203a corresponds to an "enemy character," and the kappa character image 203b corresponds to an "ally character."

During the button tilt effect BB1 (Figure 36(d)), BGM 7 continues to be output, and new tilt sounds are continuously output as sound effects, but the output of BGM 7 is stopped, for example by fading out, during the button tilt effect BB1. During the button tilt effect BB1 (Figure 36(d)), at least a portion of the effect lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) emit light in a button tilt light-emitting mode. This button tilt light-emitting mode is a cyclical change mode that cyclically switches between multiple light colors (here, white and orange) corresponding to multiple individual images (here, first and second tilt images 205a, 205b).

Note that this button teasing effect BB1 is not limited to being executed as part of a button preview effect, and like other teasing effects, it can be executed in various preview effects and reach effects other than button preview effects.

Following button prompt effect BB1 is high-brightness effect WO62 (Fig. 36(e)), which displays high-brightness image 170m, followed by operation prompt effect BB2 (Fig. 36(f)), which displays operation prompt image 206 prompting the player to operate effect button (operation means) 34. Here, operation prompt image 206 is composed of a button image (operation target image) 206a indicating the effect button (operation means) 34 to be operated, and an operation mode notification image 206b indicating the operation mode for the effect button 34 to be operated. During operation prompt effect BB2, a monster character image 203a and a kappa character image 203b are displayed together, and operation prompt image 206 is displayed between these character images 203a and 203b. Note that during operation prompt effect BB2, text image 201 and effect image 204 continue to be displayed in front of character images 203a, 203b, etc.

In addition, when the high-brightness effect WO62 starts, a second emphasis sound is output as a sound effect. Furthermore, at least some of the effect lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) emit light in a second high-brightness medium light-emitting mode, for example, blue, during the high-brightness effect WO62, and emit light in an operation-waiting light-emitting mode, for example, flashing blue, during the operation prompt effect BB2.

When the effect button 34 is operated during the operation prompt effect BB2, i.e., during the valid operation period (Fig. 36(f)), a high-brightness effect WO63 (Fig. 36(g)) is displayed, which reduces the visibility of the image behind the high-brightness image 170n (such as the operation prompt image 206 in this case), and then a post-operation successful effect BB3A (Fig. 36(h)) begins as the post-operation effect BB3. Here, in the high-brightness effect WO63, the high-brightness image 170n begins to be displayed in the area corresponding to the operation prompt image 206 and character images 203a and 203b. While the high-brightness image 170n is displayed (during the high-brightness effect WO63), the operation prompt image 206, character image 203b, text image 201, and effect image 204 are erased from the screen, and, for example, a monster character image 203a is displayed in a fallen position, along with a new text image 207 such as "Success."

In addition, when the high-brightness effect WO63 begins, a third emphasis sound is output as a sound effect, and during the post-operation success effect BB3A, a success sound is output as a sound effect. Furthermore, at least a portion of the effect lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) emit light in a third high-brightness medium light-emitting mode, for example, white, during the high-brightness effect WO63, and emit light in a success light-emitting mode, for example, red, during the post-operation success effect BB3A.

Next, we will explain in more detail the button flashing effect BB1 in relation to the button preview effect 2 shown in Figure 36. Figures 37 to 39 show the changes in the display screen and light-emitting means for each frame during the button flashing effect BB1 shown in Figure 36(d).

This button promotional effect BB1 is configured to alternately display a first promotional image (individual image) 205a having a monster character image 203a and a second promotional image (individual image) 205b having a kappa character image 203b. Furthermore, at this time, the first promotional image 205a corresponding to the "enemy character" is displayed first, followed by the second promotional image 205b corresponding to the "ally character." Note that the opposite may also be configured so that the second promotional image 205b corresponding to the "ally character" is displayed first, followed by the first promotional image 205a corresponding to the "enemy character."

The performance period of the button teaser performance BB1 is made up of multiple (here, five types) first to fifth switching display periods. In the first switching display period, each image 205a, 205b is displayed once for eight frames (two times in total) (Fig. 37(a1), (a2)). In the subsequent second switching display period, each image 205a, 205b is displayed twice for six frames (four times in total) (Fig. 37(b1) to (b4)). In the subsequent third switching display period, During the display period, each image 205a, 205b is displayed three times for four frames each (six times in total) (Fig. 38 (c1) to (c6)), and during the subsequent fourth switching display period, each image 205a, 205b is displayed three times for two frames each (six times in total) (Fig. 39 (d1) to (d6)), and during the subsequent fifth switching display period, each image 205a, 205b is displayed six times for one frame each (12 times in total) (Fig. 39 (e1) to (e12)).

In this way, during button flashing performance BB1, the display duration of each image 205a, 205b (i.e., the switching time interval between first flashing image 205a and second flashing image 205b) gradually shortens from 8 frames to 6 frames to 4 frames to 2 frames to 1 frame as the switching display period progresses, and the number of switches for the same display duration gradually increases from 1 to 2 to 3 to 3 to 6 as the switching display period progresses. Note that throughout the entire first to fifth switching display periods, a character string image 201 and an effect image (specific image) 204 are displayed in front of the first and second flashing images 205a, 205b.

Furthermore, the display position of the character image 203a in the first tilt-up image 205a changes before and after the display period of the second tilt-up image 205b (first action), and the display position of the character image 203a gradually moves from the center of the screen to one side in the left-right direction (here, the right side) over time (see the first frame of each of Figures 37(a1) → (b1) → (b3) → Figures 38(c1) → (c3) ...). Furthermore, the first tilt-up image 205a performs a second action different from the first action, for example, a swinging action at the same position, in multiple consecutively displayed frames (see all frames such as Figure 37(a1)).

Furthermore, with regard to the second tilt image 205b, the display position of the character image 203b changes before and after the display period of the first tilt image 205a (first action), and the display position of the character image 203b gradually moves from the center of the screen to the other side in the left-right direction (here, the left side) over time (see the first frame of each of Figures 37(a2) → (b2) → (b4) → Figures 38(c2) → (c4) ...). Furthermore, the second tilt image 205b performs a second action different from the first action, for example, a swinging action at the same position, in multiple consecutively displayed frames (see all frames such as Figure 37(a2)).

As a result, character images 203a and 203b, which were both displayed in approximately the center of the screen when button-tapping performance BB1 began, gradually move left and right over time, and when button-tapping performance BB1 ends and they are displayed on a single screen (Figure 36 (f)), they will be facing each other.

As described above, the display position of the character image may be changed or not changed when the frame display period switches (e.g., from the 8-frame period to the 6-frame period). If there are multiple character images, the display position of a specific character (e.g., the first tilting image) may be changed, while the display position of another character (e.g., the second tilting image) may not be changed. In addition, in multiple frames in which the same tilting image is displayed consecutively (e.g., all frames in Figure 37 (a1)), the image may not be accompanied by a rocking motion. The second motion is not limited to a rocking motion, and the tilting image may be gradually enlarged or reduced. In this case, the tilting image may be enlarged or reduced at a higher magnification or reduction ratio when the frame display period switches (e.g., from the 8-frame period to the 6-frame period).

Furthermore, during the button flashing effect BB1, the effect lamp L emits light in a cyclical change mode that cycles through multiple light colors (here, white and orange) corresponding to multiple individual images (here, first and second flashing images 205a and 205b), and the time interval between these multiple light colors is controlled to gradually shorten over time. In the examples of Figures 37 to 39, the light color of the effect lamp L is switched in accordance with the switching timing of the first and second flashing images 205a and 205b, but the switching timing of the first and second flashing images 205a and 205b does not have to coincide with the switching timing of the light color of the effect lamp L.

As explained above, in button preview performance 2, a button promotion performance (switching display performance) BB1 is performed in which multiple types (two types in this case) of first and second promotional images (individual images) 205a, 205b are alternately displayed. This button promotion performance BB1 includes a first switching display period in which the first and second promotional images 205a, 205b are displayed for a first time (e.g., a time corresponding to eight frames), and a second switching display period in which the first and second promotional images 205a, 205b are displayed for a second time (e.g., a time corresponding to six frames) that is shorter than the first time. The first and second promotional images 205a, 205b are switched more frequently during the second switching display period than during the first switching display period. Furthermore, an effect image (specific image) 204 is displayed in front of the first and second promotional images 205a, 205b, spanning both the first switching display period and the second switching display period.

Furthermore, the first tilting image (specific individual image) 205a includes a character image 203a, and the display position of the character image 203a is different between a first display state in which the first tilting image (specific individual image) 205a is displayed and a second display state in which, after the first display state, the image is switched to a second tilting image (another individual image) 205b and the first tilting image 205a is displayed again. Similarly, the second tilting image (specific individual image) 205b includes a character image 203b, and the display position of the character image 203b is different between a first display state in which the second tilting image (specific individual image) 205ab is displayed and a second display state in which, after the first display state, the image is switched to the first tilting image (another individual image) 205a and the second tilting image 205b is displayed again.

Example modifications to the above button flaring effect BB1 are described below. While Figures 37 to 39 show an example in which effect image 204, which constitutes a so-called "converging line," is displayed from the start of button flaring effect BB1, effect image 204 may also be configured to be displayed at a predetermined point during button flaring effect BB1. In this case, it is desirable to start displaying effect image 204 during the switching display period in which the display duration of each image 205a, 205b is longest (here, the period shown in Figures 37(a1) and (a2)). Furthermore, even during this period, it is particularly desirable to start displaying effect image 204 before switching between first projection image 205a corresponding to the "enemy character" and second projection image 205b corresponding to the "ally character" (here, during the period shown in FIG. 37(a1) while first projection image 205a is being displayed). However, effect image 204 may also be started to be displayed after switching between first projection image 205a and second projection image 205b (here, during the period shown in FIG. 37(a2) while second projection image 205b is being displayed). Furthermore, effect image 204 may be started to be displayed not during the switching display period during which the display duration of images 205a and 205b is the longest (here, the period shown in FIGS. 37(a1) and (a2)), but during a subsequent switching display period. However, even in this case, it is desirable to start displaying effect image 204 during the switching display period during which first projection image 205a corresponding to the "enemy character" is being displayed.

The display mode of the effect image 204 that constitutes the "convergent lines" may also be changed depending on the length of the display duration of each image 205a, 205b. For example, as the switching display period becomes successively shorter (e.g., 8 frames → 6 frames → 4 frames), the thickness of the convergent lines may be made thicker (or thinner), the number of convergent lines may be increased (or decreased), or the color of the convergent lines may be changed (e.g., reliability information may be added). Similarly, the display mode of the effect image 204 may also be changed depending on the switching between each image 205a, 205b. The display mode of the effect image 204 may also be different when the first tilt-up image 205a is displayed and when the second tilt-up image 205b is displayed.

Figures 37 to 39 show an example in which the first promotional image 205a corresponding to the "enemy character" and the second promotional image 205b corresponding to the "ally character" are alternately displayed consistently from the beginning to the end of the button promotion effect BB1. However, at a predetermined timing when the display duration of each image 205a, 205b gradually becomes shorter, for example, when the fifth switching display period in which images are switched every frame begins, the image may be switched to a different type of image, for example, an ally/enemy image displaying both an "enemy character" and an "ally character." In this case, the ally/enemy image may be displayed continuously, or the ally/enemy image may be alternately displayed with a white image in which neither an "enemy character" nor an "ally character" is displayed.

Figures 37 to 39 show an example in which the switching timing of each image 205a, 205b is synchronized with the switching timing of the light color of the performance lamp L. However, the switching timing of each image 205a, 205b does not have to be synchronized with the switching timing of the light color of the performance lamp L. For example, during the first switching display period in which images are switched every 8 frames, the light color of the performance lamp L may be switched even more frequently, approximately every 6 frames, or during the second switching display period in which images are switched every 6 frames, the light color of the performance lamp L may be switched even more frequently, approximately every 4 frames. Furthermore, until the display duration of each image 205a, 205b reaches a predetermined length (e.g., 6 frames), the switching frequency of the light color of the performance lamp L may be made higher than the switching frequency of the image (the duration of the same light color may be shortened), and thereafter the switching frequency of the light color of the performance lamp L may be made lower than the switching frequency of the image (the duration of the same light color may be longer) (e.g., during the fifth switching display period, the image may be switched every frame, but the light color of the performance lamp L may be switched approximately every 3 frames). Furthermore, if the timing for switching the luminous color of the effect lamp L is shortened over time, the timing for changing the luminous color switching timing does not have to coincide with the timing for changing the image switching timing. Furthermore, the timing for switching the luminous color of the effect lamp L may be constant (not shortened).

The "concentration lines" displayed when displaying an "enemy character" may be different from the "concentration lines" displayed when displaying an "ally character". Furthermore, different "concentration lines" may be displayed when displaying an "enemy character" at the timing of Figure 37 (a1) and when displaying an "enemy character" at the timing of Figure 33 (b1). Similarly, different "concentration lines" may be displayed when displaying an "ally character" at the timing of Figure 37 (a2) and when displaying an "ally character" at the timing of Figure 33 (b2). Furthermore, regardless of these timings, the "concentration lines" may be different between Figure 37 (b1) and Figure 37 (b3), and between Figure 37 (b2) and Figure 37 (b4).

A different "concentrated lines" may also be displayed for each switching display period. However, in this case, it is not necessary to make the "concentrated lines" different for all switching display periods; it is sufficient that the "concentrated lines" for at least one switching display period be different from the "concentrated lines" for other switching display periods. Furthermore, if there are multiple switching display periods, one or more switching display periods may be provided in which "concentrated lines" are displayed in a first display mode, and one or more switching display periods in which "concentrated lines" are displayed in a second display mode that is different from the first display mode. In this case, the switching display periods may be configured so that there are more switching display periods in which "concentrated lines" are displayed in the second display mode than in the first display mode, or vice versa. Furthermore, different "concentrated lines" may be defined as lines that are different in display mode; for example, different line lengths, line colors, display locations, dynamic patterns, etc., are considered different "concentrated lines."

Furthermore, rather than being limited to changing the display position of each character image as the switching display period progresses, or in addition to this, each character image may be configured to expand or contract as the switching display period progresses. In this case, it is desirable for each character to expand or contract toward approximately the center of the "concentration line." Furthermore, the "concentration line" may be configured to be displayed in a line color that corresponds to the luminous color of the performance lamp, or in a line color that differs from the luminous color of the performance lamp. For example, if the luminous color of the performance lamp changes as the switching display period progresses, the line color of the "concentration line" may also be configured to change in accordance with the change in the luminous color of the performance lamp. To avoid visual clutter, the line color of the "concentration line" may be a line color that differs from the luminous color of the performance lamp. Incidentally, a similar configuration may be used even if the luminous color of the performance lamp does not change as the switching display period progresses.

The various configurations in the button preview effect 2 described above are not limited to this button preview effect 2, but can also be used in various other effects (preview effects and partial effects). For example, the various configurations in the button preview effect 2, such as the high-brightness effects WO61, WO62, and WO63, and the button teasing effect BB1, may also be used in the step-up preview effect, reach preview effect, etc. described above.

[Interruption notice effect]
40 to 44 show an example of an interrupt notice effect executed during a reach fluctuation in a reach fluctuation pattern. This interrupt notice effect is executed by interrupting during a reach fluctuation, and is configured to have a higher jackpot reliability than when this interrupt notice effect is not executed (when the reach fluctuation continues without being interrupted). Note that the jackpot reliability of the interrupt notice effect in this embodiment is higher than that of other notice effects, as shown in FIG.

Furthermore, multiple types (here, two types shown in Figure 40) of presentation modes (variations) are available for this interrupt preview presentation. The reliability of a jackpot is set to be higher for the second presentation mode IRb (Figure 40(b)) than for the first presentation mode IRa (Figure 40(a)). These multiple types (two types) of presentation modes IRa and IRb are generally similar in terms of the characters that appear in the presentation image and their actions, but the dialogue strings displayed in front of the character images, etc., the corresponding voiced dialogue, and the base color of the presentation image are different. That is, as shown in Figure 40, the same kappa character image is displayed in the first and second presentation modes IRa and IRb, but the dialogue strings displayed in front of the character image and the corresponding voiced dialogue are different, being "Lucky!" and "Chance!" respectively.

In addition, the display color of the dialogue text and the base color of the effect image are also different. The display color (internal color) and base color of the dialogue text corresponding to the first and second effect modes IRa and IRb are "red" and "gold," respectively. Thus, the first and second effect modes IRa and IRb have different jackpot reliability depending on the display color of the text. Therefore, the text image (specific text information) or the interrupt notice effect image containing that text image can be said to contain jackpot reliability information. As mentioned above, because the interrupt notice effect itself has a high jackpot reliability (Figure 12), some effect modes with a low jackpot reliability (here, the effect mode in which the dialogue text display color and base color are "blue") are not available. Of course, the multiple effect modes are not limited to two types of text colors, such as "red" and "gold," as jackpot reliability information. They can also include three or more types, such as "red," "gold," and "danger color," or even "rainbow."

Next, a specific example of the interrupt notice effect will be described using an example in which the second effect mode IRb (Figure 40(b)) of the first and second effect modes IRa and IRb is selected. First, an overview will be provided with reference to Figure 41. During reach fluctuations due to the reach fluctuation pattern, before the interrupt notice effect appears, a pre-interrupt notice hype effect IR0 is performed. In this pre-interrupt notice hype effect IR0, BGM8 is output as background music from the speakers 18, 25, and on the display screen 58a, the left and right decorative symbols 164a, 164b that make up the reach are displayed in reduced form near the periphery (e.g., the upper part of the screen) with only the main body 166. A reserved base image 168 is displayed at the bottom, and a miniature symbol 165 is displayed at the top, with a display image 211 related to the pre-interrupt notice hype effect IR0 displayed behind them (Figures 41(a) and (b)).

In this pre-interrupt preview teaser IR0, the left and right decorative patterns 164a, 164b are displayed in a color (here, green) other than the blue, red, gold, etc. that make up the reliability information. The performance image 211 related to this pre-interrupt preview teaser IR0 is composed of a scene in which a kappa character flies freely through the air while emitting smoke. Note that this pre-interrupt preview teaser IR0 is a teaser that determines whether or not a pre-interrupt preview will appear, and therefore can be executed not only when a pre-interrupt preview appears afterwards, but also when a pre-interrupt preview does not appear.

In addition, during this pre-interruption teaser IR0 (Figures 41(a) and (b)), at least some of the performance lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) will emit light in a teasing light pattern corresponding to the pre-interruption teaser, for example, purple. Furthermore, during the pre-interruption teaser IR0, a predetermined sound effect, for example, a flying sound corresponding to the flight of a kappa character, may be output.

Following the pre-interrupt preview teaser IR0, the interrupt preview performance begins in the second performance mode IRb (Figure 40(b)). This interrupt preview performance is composed of the first interrupt preview performance IR1b (Figure 41(d)), the second interrupt preview performance IR2b (Figure 41(f)), and the third interrupt preview performance IR3b (Figure 41(h)). Furthermore, when transitioning from the pre-interrupt preview teaser IR0 to the first interrupt preview performance IR1b, a high-brightness performance WO71 (Figure 41(c)) is executed; when transitioning from the first interrupt preview performance IR1b to the second interrupt preview performance IR2b, a high-brightness performance WO72 (Figure 41(e)) is executed; and when transitioning from the second interrupt preview performance IR2b to the third interrupt preview performance IR3b, a high-brightness performance WO73 (Figure 41(g)) is executed.

The high-brightness effect WO71 (Figure 41 (c)) reduces the visibility of the image behind the high-brightness image 170o by displaying the high-brightness image 170o. During this high-brightness effect WO71, the image behind the high-brightness image 170o is switched from the effect image 211 relating to the pre-interrupt notice hype effect IR0 to the effect image 212 relating to the first interrupt notice effect IR1b. During the high-brightness effect WO71, concentrated lines 213, which are radial effect images extending from the center of the screen outward, are displayed together with the high-brightness image 170o. The concentrated lines 213 are displayed in a color (light blue in this case) different from the text color of the selected effect mode (second effect mode IRb in this case). The effect image 212 (Figure 41 (d)) for the first interrupt notice effect IR1b includes a character image and converging lines 214, which are displayed in a color (here, gold) that corresponds to the text color (reliability information) of the selected effect mode (here, second effect mode IRb). Note that the converging lines 214 may also be displayed in a color different from the text color (reliability information).

During the high-brightness effect WO71 (Figure 41 (c)), BGM8 continues to be output. Furthermore, at the start of the high-brightness effect WO71, a predetermined first emphasis sound is output as a sound effect. Furthermore, during the high-brightness effect WO71, at least a portion of the effect lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) emit light in a first high-brightness medium light-emitting mode. This first high-brightness medium light-emitting mode is configured in a color (here, white) different from the text color corresponding to the second effect mode IRb, but may also be configured to include a color corresponding to the text color.

During the first interrupt notice performance IR1b (Figure 41 (d)), the BGM8 continues to be output, and at least some of the performance lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) emit light in the first interrupt notice light-emitting mode. This first interrupt notice light-emitting mode is the same as the first high-brightness medium light-emitting mode (here, white), but may also be different from the first high-brightness medium light-emitting mode. In this case, the first interrupt notice light-emitting mode may also be configured to include a color corresponding to the text color (here, gold).

The high-brightness effect WO72 reduces the visibility of the image behind the high-brightness image 170p by displaying the high-brightness image 170p. During this high-brightness effect WO72, the image behind the high-brightness image 170p is switched from the effect image 212 relating to the first interrupt notice effect IR1b to the effect image 215 relating to the second interrupt notice effect IR2b. The effect image 215 relating to the second interrupt notice effect IR2b includes a character image and a character string image 216 (here, the golden character string "Chance!" corresponding to the second effect mode IRb).

During high-brightness effect WO72 (Figure 41 (e)), BGM8 continues to be output. At the start of high-brightness effect WO72, a predetermined second accent sound is output as a sound effect. During high-brightness effect WO72, at least some of the effect lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) emit light in a second high-brightness medium light-emitting mode. This second high-brightness medium light-emitting mode includes a text color (here, gold) corresponding to the second effect mode IRb, and is, for example, a cyclical change mode of white, gold, and orange. However, this is not limited to this. The sound effects and lamp modes in high-brightness effect WO72 may be similar to those of high-brightness effect WO71 and high-brightness effect WO73, i.e., the first accent sound or the third accent sound may be used as the sound effect, and the first high-brightness medium light-emitting mode or the third high-brightness medium light-emitting mode may be used as the lamp mode.

During the second interrupt notice performance IR2b (Figure 41 (f)), the background music 8 continues to be output, and an interrupt notice voice corresponding to the "Chance!" character string image 216 is output. At this time, the character image does not lip-sync (speak), but lip-syncing may be performed. During the second interrupt notice performance IR2b, at least a portion of the performance lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) emit light in the second interrupt notice light-emitting mode. This second interrupt notice light-emitting mode, like the second high-brightness medium light-emitting mode, includes a character color (here, gold) corresponding to the second performance mode IRb, and may be, for example, a cyclical change mode of white, gold, and orange, but may be at least partially different from the second high-brightness medium light-emitting mode.

The high-brightness effect WO73 reduces the visibility of the image behind the high-brightness image 170q by displaying the high-brightness image 170q. During this high-brightness effect WO73, the image behind the high-brightness image 170q is switched from the effect image 215 relating to the second interrupt notice effect IR2b to the effect image 216 relating to the third interrupt notice effect IR3b. The effect image 216 relating to the third interrupt notice effect IR3b includes decorative patterns 164a, 164b on the left and right, and the decorative patterns 164a, 164b relating to this effect image 216 are displayed in the display color (here, gold) corresponding to the second effect mode IRb.

During high-brightness effect WO73 (Figure 41 (g)), BGM8 continues to be output. At the start of high-brightness effect WO73, a predetermined third accent sound is output as a sound effect. During high-brightness effect WO73, at least some of the effect lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) emit light in a third high-brightness medium light-emitting mode. This third high-brightness medium light-emitting mode is a cyclical change mode (here, gold and orange) that includes the text color (here, gold) corresponding to the second effect mode IRb. However, this is not limited to this, and the sound effect and lamp mode in high-brightness effect WO73 may be similar to those of high-brightness effect WO71 and high-brightness effect WO72. In other words, the first accent sound or the second accent sound may be used as the sound effect, and the first high-brightness medium light-emitting mode or the second high-brightness medium light-emitting mode may be used as the lamp mode.

During the third interrupt notice performance IR3b (Figure 41 (h)), the BGM8 continues to be output, and at least some of the performance lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) emit light in the third interrupt notice light-emitting pattern. This third interrupt notice light-emitting pattern is the same as the third high-brightness medium light-emitting pattern (here, a cyclical change pattern between gold and orange), but may be at least partially different from the third high-brightness medium light-emitting pattern.

Next, we will provide a more detailed explanation of the interrupt preview effect shown in Figure 41, covering almost all of the effect periods, including the high-brightness effects WO71 to WO73. Figures 42 to 44 show changes in the display screen and light-emitting means for the periods (b) to (h) in Figure 41, at even shorter time intervals than in Figure 41. Note that in Figures 42 to 44, the time interval between adjacent frames is the same, A milliseconds, the same as in Figures 16 to 18 for the step-up preview effect.

First, we will explain the details of the high-brightness effect WO71. In the high-brightness effect WO71 shown in Figures 42(a)-(h), a high-brightness image 170o is displayed in front of the effect image 211 related to the pre-interruption teaser effect IR0, but behind the decorative patterns 164a and 164b, the mini-pattern 165, the reserved base image 168, and the reserved images X1-X4 and Y1-Y4 in front of them. The high-brightness image 170o gradually changes size and eventually disappears. That is, the high-brightness image 170o is configured so that its size (range) gradually increases over time, reaching a maximum at a predetermined point (Figures 42(a)-(e)), and then gradually decreases over time until it finally disappears (Figures 42(e)-(h)). In this way, the high-brightness effect WO71 is composed of an enlargement change effect that changes the size (range) of the high-brightness image 170o in the enlargement direction, and a reduction change effect that changes the size in the reduction direction, and although the execution time of the latter (Figures 42 (e) to (h)) is shorter than that of the former (Figures 42 (a) to (e)), the execution time of the former may be shorter than that of the latter, or may be approximately the same.

In the high-brightness effect WO71, the coverage rate of the high-brightness image 170o relative to the entire effect image 211 is less than 100%, and even when the size (range) of the high-brightness image 170o is at its maximum (Figure 42 (e)), a portion of the image behind it is outside the range of the high-brightness image 170o. Furthermore, during at least a portion of the high-brightness effect WO71 (Figures 42 (d)-(e)), a convergent line 213 is displayed around the periphery of the high-brightness image 170o in a color (here, light blue) different from the text color (here, gold) of the selected effect mode (here, the second effect mode IRb). Of course, when the size (range) of the high-brightness image 170o is at its maximum, the coverage rate of the high-brightness image 170o relative to the entire image behind it may be 100%.

The high-brightness image 170o is set to have a substantially uniform transmittance within that range. The size of the high-brightness image 170o changes over time, but the transmittance does not; for example, the transmittance is maintained at 0%. The transmittance of the high-brightness image 170o may be greater than 0%, may be non-uniform, or may be configured to change over time.

Furthermore, during the high-brightness effect WO71, the image behind the high-brightness image 170o is switched from the effect image 211 associated with the pre-interrupt preview teaser effect IR0 to the effect image 212 associated with the first interrupt preview effect IR1b. However, in a reduction change effect (Figures 42(e)-(h)) in which the size of the high-brightness image 170o is reduced, a switch emphasis image 217 is displayed in front of the post-switch effect image 212. This switch emphasis image 217 emphasizes the image switch to effect image 212, and is configured to begin displaying in a state in which it conceals almost the entire effect image 212 (Figure 42(f)), and then gradually removes the concealment (Figures 42(g)-(i)). In this case, it is configured to display a video in which glass in front of effect image 212 shatters into pieces, scattering and disappearing from the front of effect image 212. During the high-brightness effect WO71, the effect lamp L emits light in the first high-brightness medium light-emitting mode (white in this case).

The effect image 212 (Fig. 42(i) to Fig. 43(j)) for the first interrupt notice effect IR1b, which appears via the high-brightness effect WO71, includes a character image and a converging line 214, which is displayed in a color (here, gold) corresponding to the text color (reliability information) of the selected effect mode (here, second effect mode IRb). Note that during the first interrupt notice effect IR1b (Fig. 42(i) to Fig. 43(j)), the effect lamp L is illuminated in the first interrupt notice illumination mode (here, white), but the effect lamp L may also be illuminated in a color (here, gold) corresponding to the text color (reliability information).

Next, we will explain the details of the high-brightness effect WO72. In the high-brightness effect WO72 shown in Figures 43(j) to 44(s), a high-brightness image 170p is displayed in front of the effect image 212 related to the first interrupt notice effect IR1b and behind the decorative patterns 164a, 164b, mini-pattern 165, reserved base image 168, and the reserved images X1-X4 and Y1-Y4 in front of them. The high-brightness image 170p gradually changes size and eventually disappears. In other words, the high-brightness image 170p is configured so that its size (range) gradually increases over time, reaching a maximum at a predetermined point (Figures 43(j) to (n)), and then gradually decreases over time until it finally disappears (Figures 43(n) to 44(s)). In this way, the high-brightness effect WO72 is composed of an enlargement change effect that changes the size (range) of the high-brightness image 170p in the enlargement direction, and a reduction change effect that changes the size in the reduction direction, and although the execution time of the latter (Figs. 43(n) to 44(s)) is longer than that of the former (Figs. 43(j) to (n)), the execution time of the former may be longer than that of the latter, or may be approximately the same.

In the high-brightness effect WO72, the coverage rate of the high-brightness image 170p relative to the entire image behind it is less than 100%, and even when the size (range) of the high-brightness image 170p is at its maximum (Figure 43 (n)), part of the image behind it is outside the range of the high-brightness image 170p. The high-brightness image 170p is set to have a substantially uniform transmittance within its range. The size of the high-brightness image 170p changes over time, but the transmittance does not; for example, a transmittance of 0% is maintained. The transmittance of the high-brightness image 170p may be greater than 0%, may be non-uniform, or may be configured to change over time.

Furthermore, during the high-brightness effect WO72, while the image behind the high-brightness image 170p remains unchanged, a "Chance!" character string image 216, displayed in gold to indicate reliability information, is displayed in front of the high-brightness image 170p, accompanied by a predetermined character string appearance motion (Figures 43(o) to 44(s)). While this character string appearance motion is optional, in this embodiment, each character constituting the character string moves sequentially from any direction off the screen toward a predetermined position, such as the center of the screen. The character string appearance motion of the "Chance!" character string image 216 may also be configured to be performed behind the high-brightness image 170p. In this case, at the time of character string appearance, the "Chance!" character string image 216 is difficult to recognize due to the high-brightness image 170p. Thereafter, as the high-brightness image 170p gradually disappears, the "Chance!" character string image 216 becomes easier to recognize. This configuration makes it possible to improve the presentation effect of the character string image display. Furthermore, in addition to the "Chance!" character string image 216, character strings suggesting the level of expectation (such as "Super Hot") may also be displayed. By configuring the device to be able to display multiple types of character string images in this way, it is possible to further improve the dramatic effect of displaying character string images.

Here, the interruption notice voice corresponding to the "Chance!" character string image 216 is configured to begin output, for example, when the character string image 216 begins to display with the character string appearing (Figure 43 (o)), or at a predetermined point during the character string appearing. However, the interruption notice voice may also begin output when all of the characters making up the character string image 216 are displayed in their predetermined positions (Figure 44 (s)). During the high-brightness effect WO72, the effect lamp L emits light in a second high-brightness medium light-emitting mode (here, a cyclical change mode of white, gold, and orange), and during the subsequent interruption notice second effect IR2b, the effect lamp L emits light in the same interruption notice second light-emitting mode (here, a cyclical change mode of white, gold, and orange) as the second high-brightness medium light-emitting mode.

Once all characters constituting the character string image 216 are displayed in their designated positions, the interrupt notification voice output ends, and the second interrupt notification effect IR2b ends, the game transitions to the high-brightness effect WO73 and then to the third interrupt notification effect IR3b. In the high-brightness effect WO73 shown in Figures 44(s)-(w), a high-brightness image 170q is displayed in front of the effect image 215 and decorative symbols 164a and 164b related to the second interrupt notification effect IR2b, but behind the mini symbol 165, the reserved base image 168, and the reserved images X1-X4 and Y1-Y4 in front of it. The high-brightness image 170q gradually changes size and eventually disappears. Thus, unlike the high-brightness effects WO71 and WO72, the high-brightness effect WO73 reduces the visibility of the decorative symbols 164a and 164b by being displayed in front of the decorative symbols 164a and 164b.

The high-brightness image 170q changes size over time, but its transmittance does not change; for example, it is configured to maintain a transmittance of 0%. The transmittance of the high-brightness image 170q may be greater than 0%, may be non-uniform, or may be configured to change over time. As the size of the high-brightness image 170q gradually decreases, the decorative patterns 164a and 164b that were hidden by this high-brightness image 170q become visible (Figure 44 (v)). At this time, the decorative patterns 164a and 164b are displayed in the display color corresponding to the second performance mode IRb (here, gold) rather than the previous green. In this case, rather than having the decorative patterns 164a and 164b reappear in gold, a display color change animation may be executed after the high-brightness performance WO73 ends, changing the green decorative patterns 164a and 164b to gold.

During the high-brightness effect WO73, the effect lamp L emits light in the third high-brightness medium light-emitting mode (here, a cyclical change of gold and orange), and during the subsequent interrupt notice third effect IR3b, the effect lamp L emits light in the same interrupt notice third light-emitting mode (here, a cyclical change of gold and orange) as the third high-brightness medium light-emitting mode.

Note that in Figures 42(e), 43(n), and 44(u), the high-brightness image may be configured to be displayed across the entire screen. The transmittance of the high-brightness images 170o, 170p, and 170q shown in Figures 42 to 44 may also be changed. Specifically, the transmittance may be decreased as the display range of the high-brightness image increases, or increased as the display range decreases. Alternatively, the display range of the high-brightness image may be kept constant, and the transmittance may be changed to change the visibility of the high-brightness image. In this case, it is desirable to display the high-brightness image over a wide area, as in Figures 42(e), 43(n), and 44(u), and then change the transmittance without changing the display range. However, this is not a limitation. When decreasing the transmittance of the high-brightness image, the display range may be left unchanged, and when increasing the transmittance of the high-brightness image, the display range may be reduced. Additionally, the high-brightness images in the high-brightness effects WO71-WO73 may be set to have different transmittances and display ranges. Furthermore, when the transmittances and display ranges of the high-brightness images are made different, the above-mentioned content may be adopted in any manner for each of the high-brightness effects WO71-WO73.

The various configurations in the above-mentioned interrupt preview performance are not limited to this interrupt preview performance, but can also be used in various other performances (preview performances and partial performances). For example, the various configurations of the high-brightness performances WO71, WO72, WO73, etc. in the interrupt preview performance may be used in the step-up preview performance, reach preview performance, dialogue preview performance 2, etc., described above. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned interrupt preview performance, after the high-brightness performance WO71 and the first interrupt preview performance IR1b are executed, the high-brightness performance WO72 and the second interrupt preview performance IR2b are executed, and then the high-brightness performance WO73 and the third interrupt preview performance IR3b are executed. However, this is not limited to this, and the following configurations may also be used. For example, after the high-brightness performance WO71 is executed, only the first interrupt preview performance IR1b may be executed. Furthermore, after the execution of the high-brightness effect WO71, the first interrupt notice effect IR1b may be executed, followed by the execution of the high-brightness effect WO73 and the third interrupt notice effect IR3b to complete the effect. Furthermore, after the pre-interrupt notice hype effect IR0 is executed, only the high-brightness effect WO72 and the second interrupt notice effect IR2b may be executed. Furthermore, after the pre-interrupt notice hype effect IR0 is executed, the high-brightness effect WO72 and the second interrupt notice effect IR2b may be executed, followed by the execution of the high-brightness effect WO73 and the third interrupt notice effect IR3b to complete the effect. Furthermore, the execution order of the high-brightness effect WO71, the high-brightness effect WO72, and the high-brightness effect WO73 may be changed as appropriate. For example, the first interrupt notice effect IR1b may be executed after the execution of the high-brightness effect WO72, or the second interrupt notice effect IR2b may be executed after the execution of the high-brightness effect WO71. In this way, high-brightness effects WO71 to WO73 and interrupt notice effects 1 IR1b to 3 IR3b may be combined in any way.

[Dialogue preview 2]
45 to 47 show an example of a line preview effect 2 that is executed during a normal fluctuation in a reach fluctuation pattern or a normal fluctuation pattern, or during a reach fluctuation in a reach fluctuation pattern. This line preview effect 2 is an effect in which a character speaks a line, and is executed under the settings shown in Fig. 28, similar to the line preview effect 1 described above. It should be noted that the characters C1 and C2 are named "Shoji" and "Fujiko," respectively.

Next, a specific example of the dialogue preview performance 2 will be described using the case where dialogue L2 and character C2 are selected. First, an overview will be provided with reference to Figure 45. When dialogue preview performance 2 begins during a normal fluctuation in a reach fluctuation pattern or a normal fluctuation pattern (or during a reach fluctuation in a reach fluctuation pattern), BGM 9 related to this dialogue preview performance 2 begins to be output from speakers 18, 25 as background music. At the same time, decorative pattern 164 disappears from display screen 58a, and reserved pedestal image 168 is displayed at the bottom, miniature pattern 165 is displayed at the top, and behind these, a performance image 221 related to character appearance performance SB1, in which, for example, two types of characters C1 and C2 appear together, is displayed (Figure 45(a)). Furthermore, during character appearance performance SB1, at least a portion of performance lamps L (here, both frame-side lamps La and board-side lamps Lb) emit light in a character appearance illumination mode, for example, white.

Then, the character appearance effect SB1 transitions to the pre-line output effect SB2. In the pre-line output effect SB2, a character designation image 222 is displayed indicating which of the two characters C1, C2 displayed in the effect image 221 will be speaking (Figure 45 (b)). This character designation image 222 is composed of a character display frame 222a of a predetermined shape (here, approximately circular) and a character face image 222b displayed within the character display frame 222a. When the character designation image 222 begins to be displayed, a high-brightness effect WO81 is executed to display a high-brightness image 170r within the character display frame 222a, and after the high-brightness effect WO81, the character face image 222b within the character display frame 222a becomes visible.

After the pre-dialogue output performance SB2, the system transitions to the dialogue output performance SB3. In the dialogue output performance SB3 (Figs. 45(c)-(e)), a dialogue character display image 223 and a character name display image 224 are displayed near the character designation image 222 (Fig. 45(c)), and then a high-brightness performance WO82 is executed, displaying a high-brightness image 170s in at least a portion of the character designation image 222, the dialogue character display image 223, and the character name display image 224, for example, in substantially all of these areas (Fig. 45(d)). The dialogue character display image 223 is composed of a dialogue display frame 223a of a predetermined shape (here, a horizontal strip) and a dialogue string 223b displayed within the dialogue display frame 223a.

In addition, in the dialogue output performance SB3, a preview voice corresponding to the dialogue character string 223b displayed in the dialogue character display image 223 is output as the dialogue sound. Here, the output of this preview voice is assumed to begin when the dialogue character display image 223 begins to be displayed and to end at a predetermined time after the high-brightness performance WO82 ends; however, the timing of the start of the preview voice output is not limited to this and may be when the display of the dialogue character display image 223 completes and the high-brightness performance WO82 begins, or when the high-brightness performance WO82 ends. Furthermore, the output of the preview voice may begin at the start of the pre-dialogue output performance SB2. In conjunction with the output of the preview voice, the character designated by the character designation image 222 and character name display image 224 (here, character C2) lip-syncs (speaks).

In addition, during the performance period from pre-line output performance SB2 to line output performance SB3, at least some of the performance lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) will emit light in the line output light emission mode (e.g., white → blue).

Next, we will provide a more detailed explanation of almost the entire duration of the dialogue preview performance 2 shown in Figure 45, including the high-brightness performances WO81 and WO82. Figures 46 to 47 show the changes in the display screen and light-emitting means for the periods (a) to (e) of Figure 45, at even shorter time intervals than in Figure 45. Note that in Figures 46 to 47, the time interval between adjacent frames is the same, A milliseconds, the same as in Figures 16 to 18 for the step-up preview performance.

During the character appearance performance SB1 of the dialogue preview performance 2, for example, the decorative pattern 164 is hidden, and a performance image 221 containing two types of characters C1 and C2 is displayed behind the mini pattern 165, reserved base image 168, and the reserved images X1-X4 and Y1-Y4 in front of it (Figure 46(a)). Also, during the character appearance performance SB1 (Figure 46(a)), the performance lamp L lights up in the character appearance light-emitting mode (white in this case).

Then, in the subsequent pre-dialogue output performance SB2, a character designation image 222 is displayed in addition to the performance image 221. The character designation image 222 is displayed, for example, so as to gradually expand (Fig. 46 (b) → (c)). At this time, a high-brightness image 170r with a transmittance of 0% is displayed within the character display frame 222a, so the character face image 222b within the character display frame 222a is not visible (high-brightness performance WO81). The size of the high-brightness image 170r expands in accordance with the expansion of the character display frame 222a, and the transmittance is uniform. Note that the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170r may be greater than 0%, or may be non-uniform.

When the character designation image 222 is displayed at a predetermined position and size, the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170r changes to 100%, ending the high-brightness effect WO81, and the character face image 222b within the character display frame 222a becomes visible (Figure 46 (d)). Almost simultaneously with the completion of display of the character designation image 222, or at a predetermined timing thereafter, the process transitions from the pre-dialogue output effect SB2 to the dialogue output effect SB3, and the dialogue text display image 223 and character name display image 224 begin to be additionally displayed near the character designation image 222. Here, the dialogue text display image 223 is displayed so as to extend in the direction in which the dialogue text string 223b is arranged (i.e., to the right) (Figures 46 (d)-(e)).

Then, once the display of the dialogue character display image 223 and the character name display image 224 is completed (Figure 46(e)), a high-brightness effect WO82 is executed, which displays a high-brightness image 170s corresponding to at least a portion of the character designation image 222, the dialogue character display image 223, and the character name display image 224 (here, substantially all of these areas) (Figures 46(e) to 47(k)). In this high-brightness effect WO82, the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170s is non-uniform and its changes are not constant, but the timing at which the transmittance reaches 100%, for example, is substantially the same throughout the entire area. That is, in the examples of FIGS. 46(e) to 47(k), the transmittance of high-brightness image 170s changes from 100% to 60% to 20% to 40% to 60% to 80% to 100% in the area (high-brightness image 170sa) corresponding to character designation image 222 and character name display image 224, whereas it changes from 100% to 70% to 40% to 55% to 70% to 85% to 100% in the area (high-brightness image 170sb) corresponding to dialogue character display image 223. The timing at which the transmittance becomes less than 100% and the timing at which the transmittance returns to 100% are substantially the same for high-brightness image 170sa corresponding to character designation image 222 and character name display image 224 and for high-brightness image 170sb corresponding to dialogue character display image 223.

It is also possible to perform high-brightness effects only on the character designation image 222 and the character name display image 224 (without performing high-brightness effects on the dialogue character display image 223). It is also possible to perform high-brightness effects only on the area corresponding to the dialogue character display image 223 (without performing high-brightness effects on the character designation image 222 and the character name display image 224). It is also possible to configure the timing for performing high-brightness effects on the character designation image 222 and the character name display image 224 to be different from the timing for performing high-brightness effects on the dialogue character display image 223. In this case, it is possible to perform high-brightness effects on the character designation image 222 and the character name display image 224 first, and then perform high-brightness effects on the dialogue character display image 223, or vice versa.

In addition, in the dialogue output performance SB3, a preview voice (here, "Here is the key to break the curse") corresponding to the dialogue string 223b displayed in the dialogue character display image 223 is output as the dialogue sound, and the character specified by the character designation image 222 and character name display image 224 (here, character C2) lip-syncs (speaks) in time with the output of the preview voice. The output of this preview voice and lip-syncing action begins, for example, when the dialogue character display image 223 starts to be displayed (Figure 46 (d)), and ends at a predetermined time after the end of the high-brightness performance WO82 (Figure 47 (k)). Note that the timing for the start of the character's lip-syncing action is preferably approximately simultaneous with the start of the dialogue sound output, but it may be before or after the start of the dialogue sound output. Also, the timing for the character's lip-syncing action to end is preferably approximately simultaneous with the end of the dialogue sound output, but it may be before or after the end of the dialogue sound output.

Furthermore, during the performance period from pre-dialogue output performance SB2 to dialogue output performance SB3, at least some of the performance lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) will emit light in the mode used for dialogue output (e.g., white to blue). In this case, the emission color of the performance lamps L may be set to switch from white to blue at a predetermined point in time, or the range of blue may gradually expand from a state in which the entire display is white until the entire display is blue.

The various configurations in the dialogue preview performance 2 described above are not limited to this dialogue preview performance 2, but can also be used in various other performances (preview performances and partial performances). For example, the various configurations of the high-brightness performances WO81 and WO82 in the dialogue preview performance 2 may also be used in the step-up preview performance, reach preview performance, dialogue preview performance 1, etc. described above.

Next, we will explain some examples of partial effects that can be used as part of various preview effects (reliability suggestion effects, reach title display effects, operation effects, reach development effects).

[Reliability suggestion]
48 to 50 show an example of a reliability suggestion effect that suggests the reliability of the occurrence of a predetermined event, such as the reliability of a jackpot. The reliability suggestion effect is configured to suggest the reliability of a jackpot by the content of the displayed character string and its display color, etc. In the reliability suggestion effect of this embodiment, the reliability of a jackpot is suggested by displaying the character strings "Good things are likely to happen" and "Maybe we can do it" from among multiple sets of character strings.

The reliability suggestion effect will now be outlined with reference to Figure 48. In this reliability suggestion effect, first, the first character string start effect PR1 (Figure 48(a)) is performed. In this first character string start effect PR1, the first character string 232 appears in front of the first effect image 231, accompanied by a first action (here, individual rotation and movement actions for each character). Here, the first effect image 231 is composed of, for example, multiple characters, and the first character string 232 is composed of the characters "Something good is going to happen." Note that the first effect image 231 and the first character string 232 are displayed behind the reserved base image 168 at the bottom end of the display screen 58a and the mini pattern 165 at the top end, respectively. Furthermore, during the first character string start effect PR1, BGM 10 is output as background music, and a first character appearance sound is output as a sound effect in synchronization with the appearance of the first character string 232, and at least a portion of the effect lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) emit light in a first character appearance light-emitting mode, flashing a predetermined color (here, gold) in synchronization with the appearance of the first character string 232, for example.

Following the first character string start effect PR1, a high-brightness effect WO91 is performed. This high-brightness effect WO91 emphasizes the appearance of the first character string 232 and is configured to reduce the visibility of the image behind the high-brightness image 170t (here, the first character string 231 and the first character string 232) by displaying a high-brightness image 170t (Figures 48(b) and (c)). During this high-brightness effect WO91, the visibility of the first character string 231 and the first character string 232 behind the high-brightness image 170t temporarily decreases and then increases, during which the first character string 231 and the first character string 232 perform a second action (here, the first character string 231 and the first character string 232 oscillate together). During the high-brightness effect WO91, BGM 10 continues to be output, and a predetermined high-brightness emphasis sound is output as a sound effect. Furthermore, during the high-brightness effect WO91, at least some of the effect lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) emit light in a medium-high-brightness mode, for example, white light.

Following the high-brightness effect WO91, the first dialogue output effect PR2 (Figure 48 (d)) is performed. In this first dialogue output effect PR2, the first effect image 231 and the first character string 232 perform a third action (here, a shrinking (zoom-out) action centered around the center of the screen) that is different from the second action in the high-brightness effect WO91, and a predetermined first internal change display is performed on the first character string 232. This first internal change display partially changes the display color of each character while moving the changed area, allowing, for example, to dynamically express the reflection of light. Furthermore, during the first dialogue output effect PR2, BGM 10 continues to be output, and the first preview voice of "Something good is going to happen" corresponding to the first character string 232 is output as the dialogue sound, and a predetermined first changed sound is output as the sound effect. Additionally, during the first line output performance PR2, at least some of the performance lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) emit light in the first line emission mode (here, the gold-colored light-emitting area moves).

After the first line output performance PR2, the screen switches to the second string start performance PR3 (Figure 48 (e)). In this second string start performance PR3, in place of the previous first performance image 231 and first string 232, the second string 233 (here, "Maybe it will work") appears accompanied by a fourth action (here, a shrinking (zooming out) action centered around the center of the screen). By performing this shrinking action, the second string 233 is perceived as moving toward the back of the screen at the first change speed. At this time, converging lines 234, which are radial effect images pointing outward from the center of the screen, are displayed on the screen in response to the fourth action of the second string 233. Furthermore, during the second character string start effect PR3, BGM 10 continues to be output, and a second character appearance sound is output as a sound effect in time with the appearance of the second character string 233, and at least some of the effect lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) emit light in a second character appearance light-emitting mode (for example, gold).

Once the second character string 233 is displayed at a predetermined size in a predetermined location on the screen due to the second character string start performance PR3, the second line output performance PR4 (Figure 48 (f)) is then performed. In this second line output performance PR4, the movement of the second character string 233 transitions from the previous fourth movement to a fifth movement. The fifth movement is, for example, the same type of movement as the fourth movement (here, a zoom-out movement centered around the center of the screen), but is set to have a slower rate of change than the fourth movement. This causes the second character string 233 to be perceived as moving toward the back of the screen at a second rate of change that is slower than the previous first rate of change. Of course, the fifth movement may be a different type of movement from the fourth movement.

During the second dialogue output performance PR4, a predetermined second internal change display is performed on the second character string 233. Similar to the first internal change process, this second internal change display partially changes the display color of each character while moving the changed area, allowing for dynamic expression of light reflection, for example. The second internal change display may be the same as the first internal change display, or may differ in at least one of the types of color changed or the rate of change. During the second dialogue output performance PR4, BGM 10 continues to be output, a second preview voice corresponding to the second character string 233 is output as the dialogue sound, and a predetermined second change sound is output as the sound effect. During the second dialogue output performance PR4, at least a portion of the performance lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamp La and the board-side lamp Lb) emit light in a second dialogue emission mode (here, the gold emission area moves).

Here, while the string is moving (operations 1 to 5), the effect lamp L may also be illuminated in a dynamic lighting mode. The dynamic lighting mode may be one in which the light color or brightness changes depending on the direction of the string's movement, or one that does not correspond to the direction of the string's movement. The effect lamp L may be illuminated in different dynamic lighting modes depending on the string's movement pattern (e.g., operations 1 to 5, as described above), or the effect lamp L may be illuminated in a common dynamic lighting mode regardless of the string's movement pattern. This configuration allows the string's movement and lighting mode to be more integrated, improving the visual effect. Furthermore, the lighting mode of the effect lamp L while the string is moving may be non-dynamic. A non-dynamic lighting mode may be one in which a predetermined color remains lit or flashes. The effect lamp L may be illuminated in different non-dynamic lighting modes depending on the string's movement pattern (e.g., operations 1 to 5, as described above), or the effect lamp L may be illuminated in a common non-dynamic lighting mode regardless of the string's movement pattern. By configuring it in this way, the movement of the strings of characters can be made more prominent, improving the dramatic effect.

Next, we will provide a more detailed explanation of almost the entire duration of the reliability indication effect shown in Figure 48. Figures 49 to 50 show changes in the display screen and light-emitting means for the periods (a) to (f) of Figure 48, at even shorter time intervals than in Figure 48. Note that in Figures 49 and 50, the time interval between adjacent frames is the same, A milliseconds, the same as in Figures 16 to 18 for the step-up preview effect.

In the first character string start effect PR1 (Figures 49(a)-(b)) of the reliability suggestion effect, a first character string 232 appears behind the mini symbol 165, reserved base image 168, and reserved images X1-X4, Y1-Y4, and in front of a first effect image 231 consisting of multiple characters. At this time, the first effect image 231 is displayed with individual rotation and movement actions (first actions) for each character, a corresponding first character appearance sound is output, and at least a portion of the effect lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) light up in a first character appearance light-emitting mode (gold flashing), making a strong impression on the player about the appearance of the first character string 232.

Following the first character string start effect PR1, a high-brightness effect WO91 is performed. In this high-brightness effect WO91 (Fig. 49(b)-(i)), a high-brightness image 170t is displayed in front of the first effect image 231 and the first character string 232, but behind the mini pattern 165, reserved base image 168, and reserved images X1-X4, Y1-Y4. This high-brightness effect WO91 is composed of an enlargement change effect (Fig. 49(b)-(e)) that changes the size (range) of the high-brightness image 170t in an enlargement direction, and a reduction change effect (Fig. 49(e)-(i)) that changes the size (range) of the high-brightness image 170t in a reduction direction. Here, in the expansion change effect (Fig. 49 (b) to (e)), the high-brightness image 170t expands from the center of the screen toward the outside, and the area other than the high-brightness image 170t gradually narrows towards the outer periphery of the screen, whereas in the contraction change effect (Fig. 49 (e) to (i)), the high-brightness image 170t contracts from the center of the screen toward the outside, and the area other than the high-brightness image 170t gradually expands from the center of the screen toward the outside.

Here, the expansion and contraction of the high-brightness image 170t does not have to be uniform over time. For example, at the end of the contraction change effect, the contraction of the high-brightness image 170t may be slowed or stopped for a certain period of time when the first effect image 231 and the first character string 232 are substantially entirely visible (Figures 49(g)-(h)). Note that the high-brightness image 170t is set to have a substantially uniform transmittance within its range, and while its size changes over time, its transmittance does not change; for example, a transmittance of 0% is maintained. However, the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170t may be greater than 0% or may be non-uniform, and the transmittance may be configured to change over time. Furthermore, during the shrinking change effect in the high-brightness effect WO91 (FIGS. 49(e)-(i)), the visibility of the first effect image 231 and first character string 232 behind the high-brightness image 170t gradually improves, and at this time, the first effect image 231 and first character string 232 sway back and forth together (second operation). Also, during the high-brightness effect WO91, at least a portion of the effect lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) emit light in a medium-high-brightness light-emitting mode (e.g., white).

In the example of Figure 45, the high-brightness effect WO91 is configured to start after the first movement of the first string 232 ends and the first string 232 reaches a predetermined position in the first string start effect PR1. However, the high-brightness effect WO91 may also be configured to start before the first movement of the first string 232 ends, i.e., before the first string 232 reaches a predetermined position.

When the high-brightness effect WO91 ends, the first dialogue output effect PR2 is performed. In this first dialogue output effect PR2 (Figures 49(i) to 50(j)), the first preview voice "Something good is going to happen" corresponding to the first character string 232 is output as the dialogue sound. At this time, the first effect image 231 and the first character string 232 shrink together at a slow speed (third action), and a first internal change display is performed on the first character string 232, in which the display color of each character partially changes while the changed area moves. As a result, the first effect image 231 and the first character string 232 move slowly toward the back of the screen, and the first character string 232 is perceived as partially reflecting light and changing its position, making a strong impression on the player of the first character string 232, which serves as reliability information.

When the first line output effect PR2 described above ends and transitions to the second character string start effect PR3 (Fig. 50 (k)-(m)), the previous first effect image 231 and first character string 232 are replaced by the second character string 233 of "Maybe it will work" and the converging lines 234, which shrink at a relatively fast rate (fourth action). This shrinking action causes the second character string 233 to appear as if it is moving toward the back of the screen at the first rate, making its appearance more memorable to the player. Furthermore, during the second character string start effect PR3, at least some of the effect lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) emit light in a second character appearance illumination mode (e.g., gold).

When the second character string 233 reaches a predetermined size, the second character string start effect PR3 transitions to the second line output effect PR4 (Figures 50(n)-(r)). This outputs a second preview voice message, "Maybe it'll work," corresponding to the second character string 233. At this time, the convergence lines 234 disappear from the screen, and the second character string 233 shrinks at a slower speed (fifth action). The second character string 233 appears to be moving slowly toward the back of the screen at a second change speed, which is slower than the first change speed. This allows the player to easily and reliably recognize the second character string 233, which represents reliability information. Furthermore, in this second line output effect PR4, a second internal change display is performed on the second character string 233, in which the display color of each character partially changes while the change moves. As a result, the second character string 233 appears to partially reflect light and change position, making a strong impression on the player of the reliability information, the second character string 233. Furthermore, during the second line output effect PR4, at least a portion of the effect lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) emit light in the second line emission mode (here, the gold-colored light-emitting area moves). The concentrated lines 234 may be configured to be displayed not only during the period shown in FIG. 46(k) to (m) (the period during the fourth action), but also during the period shown in FIG. 46(k) to (r) (the periods during the fourth and fifth actions). It is preferable to display the concentrated lines at least during the period during which the character string is dynamically displayed. It is also preferable to display the concentrated lines in a manner that corresponds to the direction of movement of the character string.

The various configurations of the reliability suggestion effect described above are not limited to this reliability suggestion effect, but can also be employed in various other effects (preview effects and partial effects). For example, various configurations of the reliability suggestion effect, such as the high-brightness effect WO91, first character string start effect PR1, first line output effect PR2, second character string start effect PR3, and second line output effect PR4, may be employed in the step-up preview effect, line preview effect 1, the reach title display effect, and reach development effect described below. Furthermore, when a character string is dynamically displayed, if there are other displayed objects, it is desirable not to dynamically display the other displayed objects. This allows the character string to be displayed more impressively. Furthermore, while the other displayed objects may be dynamically displayed, in this case, it is desirable to configure the movement distance of the other displayed objects to be shorter than the dynamic display of the character string, or to configure the dynamic speed of the other displayed objects to be slower than the dynamic display of the character string, in order to make the character string more impressive. Additionally, the character string may be intentionally configured to move a shorter distance than the other displayed objects, or to have a slower dynamic speed, thereby weakening the impact of the character string and creating a presentation that is less noticeable to the player.

[Reach title display effect]
51 and 52 show an example of a reach title display effect that displays the title of a reach effect. An overview of this reach title display effect will be provided below, first with reference to FIG. 51. In this reach title display effect, a title display start effect TS1 (FIG. 51(a)) is first performed. In this title display start effect TS1, the left and right decorative symbols 164a and 164b that make up the reach are displayed in a reduced size near the periphery (e.g., the upper part of the screen) with only the main body 166, for example. In this state, a title string 241 is displayed in a first display position near the center of the screen. During the title display start effect TS1, BGM 11 is output as background music, and a title appearance sound is output as a sound effect in sync with the appearance of the title string 241. At least a portion of the effect lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamp La and the board-side lamp Lb) emit light in a title appearance light-emitting mode, for example, flashing a predetermined color (here, white).

In the subsequent character display start performance TS2 (Figure 51 (b)), the title string 241 moves (first action) from the first display position toward a second display position, for example, at the bottom of the screen, at a first speed, and a character image 242 appears in the empty space on the screen. During this character display start performance TS2, BGM 11 continues to be output, and a character appearance sound is output as a sound effect in conjunction with the appearance of the character image 242, and at least a portion of the performance lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) emit light in a character appearance light-emitting mode, flashing, for example, a predetermined color (here, red).

Then, in the following title notification performance TS3, each character making up the title string 241 performs a different individual action (second action), causing the positional relationship of each character to transition from the first positional relationship at the start of display to a second positional relationship, and a predetermined internal change display is made to the title string 241. This internal change display partially changes the display color of each character while moving the changed area, allowing for, for example, a dynamic representation of light reflection. Note that in the first action, all characters making up the title string 241 move together at a first speed, whereas in the second action, each character moves individually at a speed slower than the first speed, with the type of action (rotation, translation, enlargement, reduction, etc.) and speed of movement differing for each character, and some characters may not move at all.

During the title notification performance TS3, BGM11 continues to be output, and at least some of the performance lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) emit light in a title notification light-emitting mode, flashing, for example, a predetermined color (here, red). Note that, although the title notification light-emitting mode is the same as the character appearance light-emitting mode here, they may be different.

Next, we will provide a more detailed explanation of almost the entire duration of the reach title display effect shown in Figure 51. Figure 52 shows the changes in the display screen and light-emitting means over the periods (a) to (c) of Figure 51, at even shorter time intervals than in Figure 51. Note that in Figure 52, the time intervals between adjacent frames are all the same, A milliseconds, the same as in Figures 16 to 18 for the step-up preview effect.

In the title display start effect TS1 (Figures 52(a)-(b)) of the reach title display effect, a title string 241 consisting of the characters "Kappa Great Adventure" is displayed in a first display position near the center of the screen, behind decorative symbols 164a, 164b, mini symbol 165, reserved base image 168, and reserved images X1-X4, Y1-Y4, arranged in a first arrangement relationship in which the size, position, and posture of the characters are not perfectly aligned. At this time, at least a portion of the effect lamps L (here, both frame-side lamps La and board-side lamps Lb) emits light in a title appearance light-emitting mode, flashing, for example, a predetermined color (here, white).

Then, in the subsequent character display start performance TS2 (Fig. 52 (c)-(d)), the title string 241 moves (first action) from the first display position toward a second display position, for example, at the bottom of the screen, at a first speed with each character maintaining a first positional relationship. Furthermore, a new character image 242 is displayed in the space vacated by the movement of the title string 241. At this time, at least a portion of the performance lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) emits light in a character appearance light-up mode, flashing, for example, a predetermined color (here, red).

Then, in the following title notification performance TS3 (Figures 52(e)-(h)), each character constituting the title string 241 performs a different action (second action) individually, causing the positional relationship of each character to transition from the first positional relationship at the start of display to a second positional relationship. This second action involves each character performing an individual action, or there may be characters that do not perform any action at all (here, the character "初"). The type and speed of the action differ for each character, and the speed of the action is slower than the first speed in the first action. Furthermore, during this title notification performance TS3, an internal change display is performed on the title string 241, partially changing the display color of each character while moving the changed area. This internal change display can, for example, dynamically express the reflection of light. During the title notification performance TS3, at least a portion of the performance lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamp La and the board-side lamp Lb) emit light in a title notification light-emitting mode, flashing a predetermined color (here, red).

The internal change display for each character may be configured to be performed simultaneously for all characters. "Simultaneously" here means that the internal change display may start simultaneously, or may occur simultaneously during the internal change display process. The display mode of the internal change display may also be configured to change over time. For example, the first display mode (e.g., a dynamic representation of light reflection) may be used when the internal change display starts, and then the second display mode (e.g., a mirror-like representation) may be used after a predetermined time has passed. Changing the internal change display mode over time in this way can improve the visual effect. Different internal change displays may also be configured to be performed depending on the reach effect. "Different" here means that at least one of the display mode of the internal change display, the duration of the internal change display, and the range of the internal change display is different. By performing different internal change displays depending on the reach effect, monotony in the visual presentation can be avoided and a more effective visual presentation can be achieved. The above-mentioned variations on the internal change display are applicable not only to the reach title display presentation, but also to all presentations that perform internal change displays.

The various configurations of the reach title display effect described above are not limited to this reach title display effect, but can also be similarly employed in various other effects (preview effects and partial effects). For example, various configurations such as the title display start effect TS1, character display start effect TS2, and title announcement effect TS3 in the reach title display effect may be employed in the step-up announcement effect, dialogue announcement effect 1, the reach development effect described below, and so on. In the above example, the character display start effect TS2 executes a first action on the character string but does not execute an internal change display, and the title announcement effect TS3 executes a second action and an internal change display on the character string. However, it is also possible to execute only an internal change display on the character string without executing a dynamic display. In this way, depending on the content of the effect, it is possible to configure the effect to perform only an internal change display, a dynamic display, or both. Furthermore, for example, it is also possible to configure the effect to perform dynamic display of the character string in both the first and second effects, while also performing an internal change display in the first effect and not perform an internal change display in the second effect. For example, both the first and second effects may display internal changes to the text, with the first effect also displaying dynamic text, while the second effect may not display dynamic text. Of course, both the first and second effects may be configured to display dynamic text and internal changes.

[Operation performance]
53 and 54 show an example of an operation effect (related to the player's operation of the operation effect) that requests the player to operate an operation means such as the effect button 34. An outline of this operation effect will be described below, first with reference to FIG. 53. In this operation effect, an operation display start effect BC1 (FIG. 53(a)) is first performed. In this operation display start effect BC1, a button image (operation target image) 251 indicating the operation target effect button (operation means) 34 and a character string image 252 such as "Make the character laugh" are displayed on the screen. At this time, the button image 251 and the character string image 252 undergo a first operation, such as a reduced display at a first change speed.

Following the operation display start effect BC1, a high-brightness effect WOA1 (Figure 53(b)) is performed. This high-brightness effect WOA1 emphasizes the appearance of button image 251 and character string image 252, and is configured to reduce the visibility of the image behind high-brightness image 170u (here, button image 251 and character string image 252) by displaying high-brightness image 170u.

Following the high-brightness effect WOA1, an operation prompt effect BC2 (Figure 53(c)) is performed. In this operation prompt effect BC2, the character string image 252 moves at a slower speed than the first action (second action). Unlike the first action, this second action involves each character slowly moving toward the center, but the second action may also be the same type of action as the first action (e.g., a shrinking action). Furthermore, for example, an operation mode notification image 253, such as "PUSH!", indicating the operation mode for the effect button 34 to be operated, is displayed in front of the button image 251. This operation mode notification image 253 is configured to perform a third action different from the character string image 252. This third action involves each character irregularly swinging, moving up and down, or the like, but all characters may also move together. Furthermore, during operation prompt effect BC2, a predetermined internal change display is performed on the character string image 252. This internal change display partially changes the display color of each character while moving the changed area, allowing for dynamic expression of light reflection, for example.

During this operation effect, BGM12 is output as background music, and at the start of the operation display start effect BC1, a predetermined emphasis sound is output over the next high-brightness effect WOA1. Also, during this operation effect, the effect lamp L remains off.

Next, we will provide a more detailed explanation of almost the entire duration of the operation presentation shown in Figure 53. Figure 54 shows the changes in the display screen and light-emitting means over the periods (a) to (c) of Figure 53, at even shorter time intervals than in Figure 53. Note that in Figure 54, the time intervals between adjacent frames are all the same, A milliseconds, the same as in Figures 16 to 18 for the step-up preview presentation.

In the operation display start effect BC1 (Fig. 54 (a) to (c)), a button image (operation target image) 251 indicating the effect button (operation means) 34 to be operated and a text image 252 of "Make the character laugh" are displayed behind the miniature pattern 165, the reserved base image 168, and the reserved images X1 to X4, Y1 to Y4, while performing a first action. The first action is an action of shrinking at a first rate of change, and is, for example, displayed so as to gradually fit within the screen from a state where it is far outside the screen.

Following the operation display start effect BC1 is the high-brightness effect WOA1. In this high-brightness effect WOA1 (Fig. 54 (c)-(g)), a high-brightness image 170u is displayed in front of the button image 251 and character string image 252, but behind the mini-pattern 165, reserved base image 168, and the reserved images X1-X4 and Y1-Y4 in front of them. The high-brightness image 170u gradually changes size and eventually disappears. In other words, the size (range) of the high-brightness image 170u gradually increases over time, reaching a maximum at a predetermined point (Fig. 54 (c)-(e)), and then gradually decreases over time until it finally disappears (Fig. 54 (e)-(g)). In this way, the high-brightness effect WOA1 is composed of an enlargement change effect that changes the size (range) of the high-brightness image 170u in the enlargement direction, and a reduction change effect that changes the size in the reduction direction, and although the execution time of the former (Figures 54 (c) to (e)) and the latter (Figures 54 (e) to (g)) is approximately the same, the execution time of the former may be shorter than the latter, or vice versa.

The high-brightness image 170u is set to have a substantially uniform transmittance within its range, but the transmittance may be non-uniform. The high-brightness image 170u changes in size over time but does not change in transmittance, maintaining a transmittance of, for example, 0%. However, the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170u may be greater than 0%, or the transmittance may change over time. The vibration effect may be initiated by the vibration means when the display of the high-brightness image 170u ends. This allows the vibration effect to be executed when the display of the high-brightness image 170u ends and the button image 251 is displayed, thereby coordinating the execution timing of the vibration effect with the display timing of the button image 251. The vibration effect may also be initiated while the high-brightness image 170u is being displayed. This allows the vibration effect to be executed without delay from the start of the display of the button image 251, enabling each effect to be executed in parallel and in an integrated manner. Furthermore, when a vibration effect is executed while the high-brightness image 170u is being displayed, the vibration effect may be executed in parallel with the start of display of the high-brightness image 170u, or the vibration effect may be started after the display of the high-brightness image 170u has started and while the high-brightness image 170u is being displayed (while the display range is being changed over time or the transmittance is being changed).

The high-brightness effect may also be executed in response to the pressing of the effect button 34. If a vibration effect is to be executed by the vibration means in response to the pressing of the effect button, the vibration effect may be initiated while the high-brightness effect is being executed. This improves the effect of the high-brightness effect. Alternatively, the vibration effect may be executed by the vibration means after the high-brightness effect is executed. Alternatively, the vibration effect may be executed after the high-brightness effect has begun to be executed and the transmittance of the high-brightness image has been improved. The vibration effect executed during the high-brightness effect and the vibration effect executed after the high-brightness effect may be configured to have different vibration modes. For example, a more subdued vibration effect may be executed during the high-brightness effect and a more intense vibration effect after the high-brightness effect is executed, or vice versa. The vibration effect executed during the high-brightness effect and the vibration effect executed after the high-brightness effect may also be configured to have different execution times. For example, the vibration effect executed during the high-brightness effect may have a shorter execution time than the vibration effect executed after the high-brightness effect is executed.

The movable body may also be configured to move in response to the depression of effect button 34. In this case, the movable body may be configured to start moving while the high-brightness effect is being executed, or may be configured to start moving after the high-brightness effect is executed. The movable body may also be configured to start moving after the high-brightness effect has begun to be executed and the transmittance of the high-brightness image has been improved. The movable body's operating time during the high-brightness effect may be different from the operating time after the high-brightness effect is executed. For example, the movable body's operating time during the high-brightness effect may be shorter than the operating time after the high-brightness effect is executed. Regarding the above, when there are multiple operation effect patterns, the system may be configured to execute a common high-brightness effect for each operation effect, or to execute different high-brightness effects depending on the operation effect pattern. There may also be cases where different high-brightness effects are executed depending on the operation effect pattern, or where a common high-brightness effect is executed. For example, the high-brightness effect WOA1 may be configured to have different content depending on the effect pattern of the operation effect (including cases where the high-brightness effect is not executed in one case and is executed in the other), and the high-brightness effect executed after the effect button 34 is pressed may be configured to execute a common high-brightness effect. In this way, by being able to execute various high-brightness effects depending on the effect pattern of the operation effect, the effect of the operation effect can be enhanced.

When the high-brightness effect WOA1 ends and the entire button image 251 and character string image 252 become visible, an operation prompt effect BC2 (Fig. 54 (g) to (i)) is performed. In this operation prompt effect BC2, an operation mode notification image 253, such as "PUSH!", indicating the operation mode for the effect button 34, which is the operation target, is displayed in front of the button image 251. Furthermore, the character string image 252 moves toward the center at a slower speed than the first action (second action), and an internal change display is performed in which the display color of each character is partially changed while the changed area moves. This internal change display can dynamically express, for example, the reflection of light. Note that the second action of the character string image 252 may be a different movement for each character. Furthermore, the operation mode notification image 253 performs an irregular movement, such as swinging or moving up and down, for each character (third action). In this way, by making the operation mode notification image 253 perform a different action than the text image 252, the operation mode notification image 253 is prevented from being obscured by the text image 252, and the player's attention can be drawn to it.

The various configurations in the above operation effects are not limited to this operation effect, but can also be used in various other effects (preview effects and partial effects). For example, various configurations such as the high-brightness effect WOA1 in the operation effects may be used in the step-up preview effect, dialogue preview effect 1, and the reach development effect described below.

[Reach development effect]
55 to 58 show an example of a reach development effect that is executed when a reach is achieved. Below, an overview of the reach development effect will be provided, first with reference to FIG. 55. In this reach development effect, when the left and right decorative symbols 164a, 164b first stop at the same symbol, such as "8-8," and reach is achieved (FIG. 55(a)), a pre-development effect RS1 (FIG. 55(b)) is performed. In the pre-development effect RS1, the left and right decorative symbols 164a, 164b are reduced in size and moved to the periphery, and then a pre-development image 261 is displayed behind the decorative symbols 164a, 164b. This pre-development image 261 is configured to include the first character. During the reach development performance, BGM 13 is output as background music, and when the reach is established (Fig. 55(a)), a symbol stop sound is output as a sound effect, and at the start of the pre-development performance RS1 (Fig. 55(b)), a pre-development voice such as "Watch me" is output as a dialogue sound. Also, from the establishment of the reach to the pre-development performance RS1, at least a part of the performance lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) emits light in a reach development light-emitting mode that alternates between orange and white, for example.

Then, by transitioning to post-development performance RS2, the pre-development image 261 is switched to the post-development image 262 including the second character (Figure 55(d)), and at the time of this switch, the high-brightness performance WOB1 is performed (Figure 55(c)). The high-brightness performance WOB1 reduces the visibility of the image behind the high-brightness image 170v (here, the pre-development image 261 and the post-development image 262) by displaying the high-brightness image 170v. In addition, at a predetermined timing during the high-brightness performance WOB1, for example, when the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170v reaches 0% and then begins to increase, or at a predetermined timing before that, a switching emphasis sound is output. Furthermore, at least some of the effect lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the board-side lamps Lb) emit light in a first high-brightness light-emitting mode (e.g., white) during the first half of the high-brightness effect WOB1, and in a second high-brightness light-emitting mode (e.g., alternating orange and white) during the second half of the high-brightness effect WOB1, for example, after the output of the switching emphasis sound begins, and emit light in a post-development light-emitting mode (e.g., orange) during the post-development effect RS2. Note that if the switching emphasis sound is output before the transmittance of the high-brightness image reaches 0%, it is desirable for the switching emphasis sound to continue to be output even after the transmittance of the high-brightness image reaches 0%. The output of the switching emphasis sound may also be configured to end during the execution of the post-development effect following the high-brightness effect.

Next, we will explain in more detail the duration of the high-brightness effect WOB1 in relation to the reach development effect shown in Figure 55. Figures 56 to 58 show changes in the display screen and light-emitting means during the duration of the high-brightness effect WOB1 shown in Figure 55(c), at even shorter time intervals than in Figure 55. Note that in Figures 56 to 58, the time interval between adjacent frames is the same, A milliseconds, the same as in Figures 16 to 18 for the step-up preview effect.

In the high-brightness effect WOB1 shown in Figures 56(a) to 58(v), when switching from the pre-development image 261 to the post-development image 262, the high-brightness image 170v is displayed in front of the pre-development image 261 and the post-development image 262, but behind the left and right decorative patterns 164a, 164b, mini pattern 165, reserved base image 168, and reserved images X1 to X4, Y1 to Y4.

Here, the high-brightness image 170v is displayed in a range (size) that covers the entire undeveloped image 261 and developed image 262 behind it, and the transmittance is approximately uniform within that display range; the display range does not change over time, but the transmittance changes over time (transmittance change processing, transmittance change presentation). The transmittance of the high-brightness image 170v is configured to gradually decrease over time, for example, from 100% to 0% (Figs. 56(a)-(i)), and after reaching 0%, maintain that state for a predetermined period of time (Figs. 56(i)-57(r)), before gradually increasing over time, for example, from 0% to 100% (Figs. 57(r)-58(v)).

Comparing the lengths of the transmittance reduction period (Figures 56(a)-(i)) during which the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170v decreases, the transmittance maintenance period (Figures 56(i)-57(r)) during which the transmittance is maintained, and the transmittance increase period (Figures 57(r)-58(v)) during which the transmittance increases, the transmittance increase period is shorter than both the transmittance reduction period and the transmittance maintenance period, and the transmittance maintenance period is longer than the transmittance reduction period. In this way, by providing a long period of time during which the transmittance is 0% (transmittance maintenance period), it is possible to add emphasis and variety to the development into a reach effect, thereby improving the presentation effect. The transmittance maintenance period may be approximately the same length as or shorter than the transmittance reduction period. The transmittance of the high-brightness image 170v during the transmittance maintenance period may be higher than 0%. The display range of the high-brightness image 170v during the transmittance maintenance period may be set so that its coverage rate with respect to the subsequent pre-development image 261, etc., is less than 100%.

In this embodiment, the transmittance decrease period and the transmittance maintenance period are both longer than the period for the mini pattern 165 to complete one cycle, and the transmittance increase period is approximately the same as the period for the mini pattern 165 to complete one cycle, but the transmittance increase period may be shorter than the period for the mini pattern 165 to complete one cycle. Also, the transmittance maintenance period may be longer than the period for the mini pattern 165 to complete one cycle, and the transmittance decrease period and transmittance increase period may be shorter than the period for the mini pattern 165 to complete one cycle.

Furthermore, during the transmittance decreasing period of the high-brightness effect WOB1, when the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170v decreases, the transmittance values of the high-brightness image 170v in each frame of Figures 56(a)-(i) gradually increase in both rate and amount of change. That is, for example, if the rate and amount of change in the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170v during the period from Figure 56(a) to Figure 56(e) (first transmittance change effect) are defined as the first change rate and the first change amount, respectively, and if the rate and amount of change in the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170v during the subsequent period from Figure 56(e) to Figure 56(i) (second transmittance change effect) are defined as the second change rate and the second change amount, respectively, the second change rate is greater than the first change rate, and the second change amount is greater than the first change amount. In this way, gradually increasing the rate and amount of change in transmittance prevents the transmittance change effect from becoming monotonous. Furthermore, by gradually increasing the rate and amount of change in transmittance, it is possible to transition to a low transmittance state relatively smoothly and in a short period of time after the player has grasped that the transmittance change effect has begun. However, this is not limited to this, and the rate and amount of change in transmittance may also be gradually decreased. In this case, it is possible to execute a transmittance change effect that leaves a more lingering impression, prevent the transmittance change effect from becoming monotonous, and enhance the effect of the effect.

Furthermore, during the transmittance increase period of the high-brightness effect WOB1, when the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170v increases, the transmittance values of the high-brightness image 170v in each frame of Figures 57(r) to 58(v) gradually decrease, from 0% to 40% to 70% to 90% to 100%, for example. That is, for example, if the rate of change in the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170v during the period from Figure 57(r) to 58(t) (second transmittance change effect) is defined as the second change rate and the second change amount, and if the rate of change in the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170v during the subsequent period from 58(t) to (v) (first transmittance change effect) is defined as the first change rate and the first change amount, the second change rate is greater than the first change rate, and the second change amount is greater than the first change amount. It is also possible to configure the rate of change and the amount of change in the transmittance to gradually increase. This prevents the transmittance change effect from becoming monotonous. Furthermore, by gradually increasing the rate and amount of transmittance change, it is possible to transition to a low transmittance state relatively smoothly and in a short time after the player understands that the transmittance change effect has begun.

During the transmittance increase period (FIG. 57(r) to FIG. 58(v)) when the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170v increases, a transition emphasis image 263 is displayed in front of the post-switch developed image 262. This transition emphasis image 263 emphasizes the image switch to the post-switch developed image 262, and is configured to initially conceal almost the entire post-switch developed image 262 (FIG. 58(s)), and then gradually remove the concealment (FIGS. 58(t) to (v)). In this example, the image is configured to show a video in which glass in front of the post-switch developed image 262 shatters into pieces and scatters, gradually disappearing from in front of the post-switch developed image 262. In this way, by making the transmittance increase period shorter than the transmittance decrease period and by displaying a video of the transition emphasis image 263 in front of the post-switch developed image 262 when it becomes visible during the transmittance increase period, it is possible to add emphasis and variety to the development into a reach effect, improving the presentation effect.

During the high-brightness effect WOB1, at least some of the effect lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the panel-side lamps Lb) first begin emitting light in a high-brightness medium first light-emitting mode (e.g., white). Then, for example, when the transmittance decrease period and the transmittance maintenance period have passed and the transmittance increase period begins, a switching emphasis sound is output, and at least some of the effect lamps L (here, both the frame-side lamps La and the panel-side lamps Lb) are switched to a high-brightness medium second light-emitting mode (e.g., alternating orange and white). Note that the output of the switching coordination sound and the switching of the effect lamps L to the high-brightness medium second light-emitting mode may occur during the transmittance maintenance period. Furthermore, the output timing of the switching coordination sound and the switching timing of the effect lamps L to the high-brightness medium second light-emitting mode may be different. For example, the output of the switching coordination sound may begin during the transmittance maintenance period, and then the effect lamps L may switch to the high-brightness medium second light-emitting mode at the start of the transmittance increase period, or vice versa.

The various configurations in the reach development effects described above are not limited to use in this reach development effect, but can also be used in various other effects (preview effects and partial effects). For example, various configurations such as the high-brightness effect WOB1 in the reach development effect may also be used in the step-up preview effect, dialogue preview effect 1, reliability suggestion effect, etc.

We've explained the eight types of preview effects and four types of partial effects individually above, but next we'll select several sets of these effects and compare them.

[Comparison between Step-Up and Reach Pre-Announcement Effects]
First, a comparison is made between the step-up notice effect and the reach notice effect. In this embodiment, the step-up notice effect (first specific notice effect) has a higher jackpot reliability than the reach notice effect (second specific notice effect) (FIG. 12), but the opposite is also possible. Also, various comparisons are made here between the step-up notice effect and the reach notice effect, but the two effects that are the subject of these various comparisons are not limited to the step-up notice effect and the reach notice effect, and may be two effects of different types or the same type (of course, a comparison between a notice effect and a partial effect may also be made, or partial effects may also be compared).

When comparing the high-brightness effect of the step-up preview effect (first preview high-brightness effect) WO11 (Figures 16(a) to 17(j)) with the high-brightness effect of the reach preview effect (second preview high-brightness effect) WO21 (Figures 21(a) to 21(f)), it is clear that the execution time of the former (approximately 9 A milliseconds) is longer than that of the latter (approximately 5 A milliseconds). On the other hand, when comparing the degree of reduction in visibility due to high-brightness images between high-brightness effect WO11 and high-brightness effect WO21, the minimum transmittance of high-brightness image 170a of high-brightness effect WO11 is 0%, while the minimum transmittance of high-brightness image 170c of high-brightness effect WO21 is greater than 0%, meaning that the degree of reduction in visibility due to the transmittance of the high-brightness image is greater in the former than in the latter. On the other hand, when comparing the range (size) of the high-brightness image in high-brightness effect WO11 and high-brightness effect WO21, the maximum value is smaller in the former than in the latter, and the degree of reduction in visibility due to the range of the high-brightness image is smaller in the former than in the latter.

In this way, when comparing high-brightness effect WO11 and high-brightness effect WO21, the degree of reduction in visibility due to the transmittance of the high-brightness image is greater in the former than in the latter, and the degree of reduction in visibility due to the range of the high-brightness image is less in the former than in the latter. However, for example, if the range (size) of high-brightness image 170a in high-brightness effect WO11 is not changed, and the range (size) of high-brightness image 170c in high-brightness effect WO21 is made to change over time, the degree of reduction in visibility due to both the transmittance and range (size) of the high-brightness image will be greater in the former than in the latter.

Note that the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170a in high-brightness effect WO11 changes from 0% to 100% in approximately 9 A milliseconds, while the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170c in high-brightness effect WO21 changes from 20% to 100% in approximately 5 A milliseconds, so the amount of change in transmittance per unit time is greater for the latter than for the former.

Furthermore, when comparing the output volume and output duration of the emphasis sound output during the high brightness effect between high brightness effect (first high brightness effect) WO11 and high brightness effect (second high brightness effect) WO21, the emphasis sound (first specific sound) output during high brightness effect WO11 has a higher output volume and a longer output duration than the emphasis sound (second specific sound) output during high brightness effect WO21.

In addition, in the step-up preview effect (first specific preview effect), a step-up preview effect image 169 is displayed that is selected from multiple different types (for example, Figures 14 (a1) to (e1), (a2) to (e2)) depending on the reliability of the jackpot, and in the high-brightness effect WO11 (Figures 16 (a) to 17 (j)), regardless of the type of step-up preview effect image 169 (i.e., in both cases where the Type A first reliability specific image and the Type A second reliability specific image are displayed), a common high-brightness image (first specified high-brightness image) 170a is displayed before it. On the other hand, the reach preview effect (second specific preview effect) displays a reach preview effect image 171 selected from multiple types (e.g., Figures 19(a)-(d)) that vary depending on the jackpot reliability, and the high-brightness effect WO22 (Figures 21(h)-22(l)) is configured to display a common high-brightness image (second specified high-brightness image) 170d before the reach preview effect image 171 regardless of the type of reach preview effect image 171 (i.e., whether the B first reliability specific image or the B second reliability specific image is displayed). The display patterns of the high-brightness image 170a of the high-brightness effect WO11 and the high-brightness image 170d of the high-brightness effect WO22 are different.

[Comparison between Step Up Preview and Button Preview 1]
Next, the step-up preview effect and the button preview effect 1 are compared. In this embodiment, the step-up preview effect (first specific preview effect) has a higher jackpot reliability than the button preview effect 1 (second specific preview effect) ( FIG. 12 ), but the opposite is also possible. The appearance rate of the step-up preview effect (first specific preview effect) is also higher than that of the button preview effect 1 (second specific preview effect), but the opposite is also possible. Here, various comparisons are made between the step-up preview effect and the button preview effect 1, but the two effects that are the subject of these various comparisons are not limited to the step-up preview effect and the button preview effect, and may be two effects of different types or the same type (of course, a comparison between a preview effect and a partial effect, or a comparison between partial effects may also be possible).

Both the step-up preview effect and button preview effect 1 are configured to display text information on the screen, but the text information such as "Something better is likely to happen" displayed in the step-up preview effect (specific text information preview effect) is specific text information to which reliability information consisting of a display mode (display color) according to the reliability of a jackpot (Figure 14), whereas the text information such as "Make the character laugh" displayed in button preview effect 1 (non-specific text information preview effect) is non-specific text information to which such reliability information is not attached, which is what distinguishes the two.

Furthermore, in the step-up preview performance (specific character information preview performance), the high-brightness performance WO11 is executed to display the specific character information, and the performance lamp L is illuminated in a first high-brightness medium light-emitting mode corresponding to the specific character information during the high-brightness performance WO11 and before all of the specific character information becomes visible (Figures 15 to 17), whereas in the button preview performance 1 (non-specific character information preview performance), non-specific character information is displayed without executing the high-brightness performance, and the performance lamp L is illuminated in an introduction light-emitting mode (predetermined light-emitting mode) regardless of the non-specific character information (Figure 24, etc.).

Furthermore, in button preview performance 1 (non-specific character information preview performance), it takes approximately 4A milliseconds (Figures 25(a)-(e)) for the non-specific character information to become easily recognizable, whereas in step-up preview performance (specific character information preview performance), it takes approximately 7A milliseconds (Figures 16(a)-(h)) for the specific character information to become easily recognizable, with the latter being longer than the former.

Furthermore, in the step-up preview effect (first character information preview effect), all of the characters that make up the character information (predetermined character information), such as "Something even better might happen," are colored a specific color, such as red, and the specific color indicates the reliability of a jackpot, whereas in the button preview effect 1 (second character information preview effect), only some of the characters that make up the character information (predetermined character information), "Make the character laugh," are colored a specific color (here, red), and the specific color does not indicate the reliability of a jackpot, which is a difference between the two. Furthermore, in the step-up preview effect (first character information preview effect), the performance lamp L is illuminated in a color that corresponds to the specific color, whereas in the button preview effect 1 (second character information preview effect), the performance lamp L is illuminated in a color that does not correspond to the specific color, which is a difference between the two. Furthermore, in the character information (predetermined character information) for "Make the character laugh" in the button preview effect 1 (second character information preview effect), the number of characters that do not have the specific color (here, red) is greater than the number of characters that have the specific color (here, red).

In this embodiment, the first character information preview effects include step-up preview effects, reach preview effects, dialogue preview effects 1, and interrupt preview effects, while the second character information preview effects are only button preview effects 1. In this way, it is desirable to configure the number of first character information preview effects to be greater than the number of second character information preview effects.

[Comparison between Step Up Preview and Dialogue Preview]
Next, the step-up preview effect and the dialogue preview effect are compared. Note that, although various comparisons are made between the step-up preview effect and the dialogue preview effect here, the two effects that are the subject of these various comparisons are not limited to the step-up preview effect and the dialogue preview effect, and may be two effects of different types or the same type (of course, a comparison between a preview effect and a partial effect, or a comparison between partial effects may also be possible).

Comparing the high-brightness effect of the step-up preview effect (C2 high-brightness effect, D2 high-brightness effect) WO11 (Figures 16(a) to 17(j)) with the high-brightness effect of the dialogue preview effect (C1 high-brightness effect, D1 high-brightness effect) WO42 (Figures 32(s) to 32(w)), the former displays high-brightness image (C2 high-brightness image, D2 high-brightness image) 170a in a manner that corresponds to the display area of specific text information such as "Even better things could happen" and its background image, and overlaps with a character image such as a fox, whereas the latter displays high-brightness image (C1 high-brightness image, D1 high-brightness image) 170i in a manner that corresponds to the display area of specific text information such as "I feel great" and does not overlap with a character image such as a boy, and so the two differ. That is, the high-brightness image (C2 high-brightness image, C2 high-brightness image) 170a in the high-brightness effect (C2 high-brightness effect, C2 high-brightness effect) WO11 of the step-up preview effect is displayed so that the character image is more difficult to see than the high-brightness image (C1 high-brightness image, C1 high-brightness image) 170i in the high-brightness effect (C1 high-brightness effect, C1 high-brightness effect) WO42 of the dialogue preview effect. Furthermore, when comparing the execution time of high-brightness effect WO11 (FIGS. 16(a) to 17(j)) and high-brightness effect WO42 (FIGS. 32(s) to 32(w)), the former (approximately 9 A milliseconds) is longer than the latter (approximately 4 A milliseconds).

[Comparison of reach preview and dialogue preview]
Next, the reach preview effect and the dialogue preview effect are compared. Note that, although various comparisons are made here between the reach preview effect and the dialogue preview effect, the two effects that are the subject of these various comparisons are not limited to the reach preview effect and the dialogue preview effect, and may be two effects of different types or the same type (of course, a comparison between a preview effect and a partial effect, or a comparison between partial effects may also be possible).

Comparing the high-brightness effects of the reach preview effects (C-2 high-brightness effects, D-2 high-brightness effects) WO22 (Figures 21(h) to 22(l)) with the high-brightness effects of the dialogue preview effects (C-1 high-brightness effects, D-1 high-brightness effects) WO42 (Figures 32(s) to 32(w)), the former displays high-brightness images (C-2 high-brightness images, D-2 high-brightness images) 170d in a manner that corresponds to the display area of specific text information such as "It's a reach!" and its background image and overlaps with the kappa character image, whereas the latter displays high-brightness images (C-1 high-brightness images, D-1 high-brightness images) 170i in a manner that corresponds to the display area of specific text information such as "I'm feeling great" and does not overlap with character images such as boys, etc., and is a difference between the two. That is, the high-brightness image (C-2 high-brightness image, D-2 high-brightness image) 170d in the high-brightness effect (C-2 high-brightness effect, D-2 high-brightness effect) WO22 of the reach preview effect is displayed so that the character image is more difficult to see than the high-brightness image (C-1 high-brightness image, D-1 high-brightness image) 170i in the high-brightness effect (C-1 high-brightness effect, D-1 high-brightness effect) WO42 of the dialogue preview effect. Furthermore, when the execution time of the high-brightness effect WO22 (FIGS. 21(h) to 22(l)) and the high-brightness effect WO42 (FIGS. 32(s) to 32(w)) are compared, the two are approximately the same (approximately 4 A milliseconds). Of course, the execution times for high-brightness effect WO22 and high-brightness effect WO42 may be different, in which case the former may be longer than the latter, or vice versa.

Although the above describes in detail embodiments of the present invention, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, in the embodiment, the special reserved notification means 333 is controlled not to issue a special reserved notification during the special advantage state and the special game state (i.e., during the right-hand play period), thereby effectively issuing a special reserved notification only for the first special reserved number on the first special symbol side and not issuing a special notification for the second special reserved number on the second special symbol side. However, it is also possible to issue a special reserved notification only for the first special reserved number on the first special symbol side and not issue a special notification for the second special reserved number on the second special symbol side. In other words, the special reserved notification means 333 may be configured to notify when the first special reserved number has reached a predetermined number, but not to notify when the second reserved number has reached a predetermined number. Furthermore, the player may be able to choose whether or not to issue a special reserved notification, and a function for setting the result of this selection may be provided.

The notification mode for the special pending notification may be one type (for example, sound only) or three or more types (for example, sound, vibration, airflow, light emission, etc.). The sound notification mode may be an audio notification of the number of pending items, such as "3," "4," or "over." The vibration means is not limited to directly vibrating the operating means, such as the effect button 34, as in the embodiment, but may be positioned at a certain distance from the operating means, such as the effect button 34 or launch handle 32, and configured so that the vibration is transmitted indirectly to the operating means. Alternatively, the vibration means may simply output a vibration sound.

After the special hold notification is made by the special hold notification means 333, if a predetermined condition is met, a notification may be made in a different manner from the special hold notification, so that the player knows that a state has been reached where resuming firing will not result in a wasted shot. Possible predetermined conditions in this case include the first special hold number (or second special hold number) falling below a predetermined number (3), or the first special hold number (or second special hold number) falling below the number at the time of the special hold notification, etc.

In the embodiments, the high-brightness image 170 displayed in the high-brightness effect has been described as having a case where the size and transmittance (uniform) change over time, a case where, of the size and transmittance, only the transmittance (uniform) changes over time while the size remains unchanged at a coverage rate of 100% relative to the image behind, and a case where, of the size and transmittance, only the size changes over time while the transmittance (uniform in this case) remains unchanged (Figure 55(a)). However, this is not limited to this. Figure 59(b) shows a case where, of the size and transmittance of the high-brightness image 170, only the transmittance changes over time while the size remains unchanged at a coverage rate of less than 100% relative to the image behind.

Figure 59(c) also shows a case where the transmittance of the high-brightness image 170 is non-uniform, and the size and transmittance change over time. In the example of Figure 59(c), the rate of change in transmittance gradually increases from the center to the periphery of the high-brightness image 170, but conversely, the rate of change in transmittance may be configured to gradually decrease from the center to the periphery of the high-brightness image 170. Also, Figure 59(c) shows an example where the transmittance changes stepwise within the high-brightness image 170, but the transmittance may be configured to change approximately continuously within the high-brightness image 170.

The types of high-brightness effects are classified into six types: Type 1, in which the size and/or position and transmittance (uniform) of the high-brightness image change over time; Type 2, in which the size and/or position and transmittance (non-uniform) of the high-brightness image change over time; Type 3, in which, of the size and/or position and transmittance of the high-brightness image, the size and/or position change over time but the transmittance (uniform) does not change; Type 4, in which, of the size and/or position and transmittance of the high-brightness image, the size and/or position change over time but the transmittance (non-uniform) does not change; Type 5, in which, of the size and/or position and transmittance of the high-brightness image, the transmittance (uniform) changes over time but the size and/or position does not change; and Type 6, in which, of the size and/or position and transmittance of the high-brightness image, the transmittance (non-uniform) changes over time but the size and/or position does not change. Specific variations of each effect shown in the embodiments are as follows: That is, in the step-up preview effect, both high-brightness effects WO11 and WO12 are in the first form, but high-brightness effect WO11 may be in any of the second to sixth forms, and high-brightness effect WO12 may be in any of the second to sixth forms. In this case, high-brightness effects WO11 and WO12 may be in the same form or different forms, and the combination is arbitrary.

In the reach preview effect, both high-brightness effects WO21 and WO22 were set to the fifth form, but high-brightness effect WO21 may be any of the first through fourth or sixth forms, and high-brightness effect WO22 may be any of the first through fourth or sixth forms. In this case, high-brightness effects WO21 and WO22 may be the same form or different forms, and any combination is possible. In button preview effect 1, both high-brightness effects WO31 to WO33 were set to the first form, but high-brightness effect WO31 may be any of the second through sixth forms, high-brightness effect WO32 may be any of the second through sixth forms, and high-brightness effect WO33 may be any of the second through sixth forms. In this case, high-brightness effects WO31 to WO33 may be the same form or different forms, and any combination is possible. In dialogue preview performance 1, high-brightness performance WO41 is the fifth form and high-brightness performance WO42 is the third form, but high-brightness performance WO41 may be any of the first to fourth or sixth forms, and high-brightness performance WO42 may be any of the first, second, fourth to sixth forms. In this case, high-brightness performance WO41 and WO42 may be the same form or different forms, and the combination is arbitrary.

In the pseudo-consecutive preview effect, both high-brightness effects WO51 and WO52 are shown in the fifth form, but high-brightness effect WO51 may be any of forms 1 through 4, or 6, and high-brightness effect WO52 may be any of forms 1 through 4, or 6. In this case, high-brightness effects WO51 and WO52 may be the same form or different forms, and any combination is possible. In button preview effect 2, the form of each of high-brightness effects WO61 through WO63 is not explicitly stated, but high-brightness effect WO61 may be any of forms 1 through 6, high-brightness effect WO62 may be any of forms 1 through 6, and high-brightness effect WO63 may be any of forms 1 through 6. In this case, high-brightness effects WO61 through WO63 may be the same form or different forms, and any combination is possible. In the interrupt preview effects, all of the high-brightness effects WO71 to WO73 are in the third form, but high-brightness effect WO71 may be in any of the first, second, or fourth to sixth forms, high-brightness effect WO72 may be in any of the first, second, or fourth to sixth forms, and high-brightness effect WO73 may be in any of the first, second, or fourth to sixth forms. In this case, high-brightness effects WO71 to WO73 may be the same form or different forms, and any combination is possible.

In dialogue preview performance 2, high-brightness performance WO81 was set to the third form and high-brightness performance WO82 was set to the sixth form, but high-brightness performance WO81 may be set to any of the first, second, or fourth to sixth forms, and high-brightness performance WO82 may be set to any of the first to fifth forms. In this case, high-brightness performance WO81 and WO82 may be the same form or different forms, and the combination is arbitrary. In the reliability suggestion performance, high-brightness performance WO91 was set to the third form, but high-brightness performance WO91 may be set to any of the first, second, or fourth to sixth forms. In the reach title display performance, high-brightness performance WOA1 was set to the third form, but high-brightness performance WOA1 may be set to any of the first, second, or fourth to sixth forms. In the operation presentation, the high-brightness presentation WOB1 is in the fifth form, but it may also be in any of the first to fourth or sixth forms. As described above, by varying the form of the high-brightness presentation for each preview presentation, or for each high-brightness presentation within a preview presentation, it is possible to execute a variety of high-brightness presentations for each preview presentation, preventing monotony in the presentation and enhancing the presentation effect.

In the step-up effect of the embodiment, regardless of whether any of the five types (FIGS. 14 (a1) to (e1)) of the third second half effect ST3B is selected or any of the five types (FIGS. 14 (a2) to (e2)) of the fifth second half effect ST5B is selected, the high-brightness effects WO11 and WO12 are configured to display the same high-brightness images 170a and 170b, respectively. However, different high-brightness images may be displayed depending on the reliability of a jackpot, etc. Similarly, in the reach preview effect of the embodiment, regardless of whether any of the first to fourth effect modes (FIGS. 19 (a) to (d)) is selected, the high-brightness effect WO22 is configured to display the same high-brightness image 170d. However, different high-brightness images may be displayed depending on the reliability of a jackpot, etc. In this case, at least one of the size and/or transmittance of the high-brightness image may be varied depending on the reliability of a jackpot, etc., or the change pattern of the size and/or transmittance of the high-brightness image may be varied.

As examples of specific image end effects that are executed when the display of a specific image containing reliability information regarding the occurrence of a specified event ends, the step-up preview effect in this embodiment uses a high-brightness effect WO12, and the reach preview effect uses a hidden image 172 that temporarily hides the specific image. However, these are not limited to these, and effects such as simply erasing text information from the screen are also included in specific image end effects.

When preview performances A and B, which include high-brightness effects, can be executed, the minimum transmittance of the high-brightness image, the rate of change in transmittance, etc., may be different between preview performances A and B, or the transmittance of the high-brightness image may be changed over time, or the size of the high-brightness image may be changed over time. In this case, the reliability of the occurrence of a specified event may be different between preview performances A and B, but it is desirable to configure the system so that a higher minimum transmittance of the high-brightness image indicates higher reliability, and a longer time period over which the transmittance changes indicates higher reliability.

Of all the above-mentioned effects (step-up preview effect in Figures 13 to 18, reach preview effect in Figures 19 to 23, button preview effect 1 in Figures 24 to 27, dialogue preview effect 1 in Figures 28 to 32, pseudo-consecutive preview effect in Figures 33 to 35, button preview effect 2 in Figures 36 to 39, interrupt preview effect in Figures 40 to 44, dialogue preview effect 2 in Figures 45 to 47, reliability suggestion effect in Figures 48 to 50, reach title display effect in Figures 51 to 52, operation effect in Figures 53 to 54, reach development effect in Figures 55 to 58), examples have been shown in which text is displayed on the screen in effects other than the reach development effect in Figures 55 to 58, but each effect in which these text strings are displayed may also be configured as follows (of course, text may also be displayed in the reach development effects in Figures 55 to 58, and the text may be configured as follows). That is, while the above example displays a two-dimensional character string, the present invention is not limited to this and may be configured to display a three-dimensional character string. Specifically, by representing the characters three-dimensionally so that they have side portions, a dynamic display effect can be executed in which the angle at which the side portions and front portions of the characters are visible changes when the characters themselves are rotated (dynamically displayed) at a predetermined speed. This allows, for example, the character string to be displayed so that the side portions are more visible than the front portions when the character string begins to be displayed. Then, as the character string is dynamically displayed, the front portions of the characters gradually become more visible than the side portions. This gradually changes the appearance of the characters from the side portions to the front portions, making it possible to create an effect that makes it easier for the player to perceive the character string as the dynamic display execution time elapses. Furthermore, such a dynamic display effect may be executed for each character forming the character string. In this case, the angle at which the side portions and front portions are visible may be configured to differ depending on the character. Furthermore, the size of each character forming the character string may be different. In this case, the angle at which the side portions and front portions are visible may be configured to differ depending on the size of the character. Furthermore, each character in the character string may be configured to rotate (dynamically display) at a different speed. This allows the speed at which the character transitions from a state in which the side portions are more visible to a state in which the front portions are more visible to be different for each character. Furthermore, instead of transitioning from a state in which the side portions are more visible to a state in which the front portions are more visible, the character string may be configured so that the front portions are more visible at the start of display, and then the side portions become more visible as time passes during dynamic display. Depending on the character, the dynamic display may be configured to display the character in a state in which the side portions are more visible, and then gradually transition so that the front portions become more visible, or to display the character in a state in which the front portions are more visible, and then gradually transition so that the side portions become more visible.

Among all the effects described above, in each effect that displays a character string, the display mode of the character outline, for example, the type of outline (color, width, etc.), may be varied depending on the type and reliability of the character string (such as jackpot reliability). For example, in the example of Figure 19 relating to the reach preview effect, of the four types of character strings, "Reach!", "SP Reach!", "Big Chance!!", and "Super Hot!!", the first outline may be used for the same types of character strings, "Reach!" and "SP Reach!", while the second outline may be used for the other types, "Big Chance!!" and "Super Hot!!". Furthermore, of these four types of character strings, the first outline may be used for the relatively less reliable "Reach!", "SP Reach!", and "Big Chance!!", while the relatively more reliable "Super Hot!!" may be used for the second outline, which is different from the first outline. Furthermore, for the relatively more reliable "Super Hot!!", it is desirable to use a "danger color" for the outline, which corresponds to the reliability. Additionally, the outline colors for "It's a win!", "It's a special win!", and "Big chance!!" may also be set to correspond to their respective reliability levels. Furthermore, when the outline colors of multiple types of character strings are set to correspond to their reliability levels, it is desirable to differentiate relatively highly reliable character strings (for example, "Big chance!!" and "Super hot!!") from relatively less reliable character strings in terms of the outline display mode other than color, such as by using an outline width that differs from other character strings or by using outlines that are displayed in three dimensions.

Among all the effects described above, in each effect that displays a string, the display color (internal color) of each string may be different for each preview effect. For example, in the example of Figure 19 regarding the reach preview effect, the display colors (internal colors) of the strings are blue for "Reach!", red for "SP Reach!", gold for "Big Chance!!", and danger for "Super Hot!!". However, different preview effects may use different display colors, such as blue for "Reach!", purple for "SP Reach!", red for "Big Chance!!", and gold for "Super Hot!!". In this case, when comparing previews, even the same "Big Chance!!" may be red or gold. In this case, for example, the gold "Big Chance!!" is set to have a higher reliability than the red "Big Chance!!". In this way, by assigning different display colors to each preview depending on the reliability, even if the strings are similar or common, the reliability indication of the preview effect can be prevented from becoming monotonous, improving the presentation effect by reducing player boredom. Furthermore, if in the first notice "It's a reach!" is blue, "It's a SP reach!" is red, "Big chance!!" is gold, and "Super hot!!" is danger color, and in the second notice "It's a reach!" is blue, "It's a SP reach!" is purple, "Big chance!!" is red, and "Super hot!!" is gold, the first notice has a higher reliability assigned to similar character strings, but it is desirable to set the timing of the notice to appear later for a notice with a higher reliability (first notice) than for a notice with a lower reliability (second notice). Specifically, the first notice may appear in the latter half of the timing before the reach, and the second notice in the first half of the timing before the reach, or the first notice may appear after the reach and the second notice in the timing before the reach, or the first notice may appear in the latter half of the timing after the reach and the second notice in the first half of the timing after the reach, or the first notice may appear during the SP reach and the second notice in the reach, etc. In any case, it is desirable to configure the first preview to be executed after the second preview, and as long as this relationship is maintained, the detailed timing of each appearance may be combined in any way as described above. However, this is not a limitation, and the first preview may be configured to be executed before the second preview. Even in this case, as long as the relationship of the appearance timing is maintained, the detailed timing of each appearance may be combined in any way as described above.

When a character string contains reliability information, the thickness, color, width, etc. of the character outline may be configured to vary depending on the jackpot reliability. The outline portion of the character may also be displayed in a base color that indicates the jackpot reliability. For example, if the character color is "red," the outline color may be a color different from the base color of the character string (e.g., white), and if the character color is "gold," the outline color may be the same color as the base color of the character string (e.g., gold). In this way, the outline color of the character may be configured to vary depending on the jackpot reliability. Not only may the outline color of the character be different, but the thickness, width, or presence or absence of an outline may also be different. The thickness, color, width, etc. of the character outline may also be configured to vary depending on the content of the preview, regardless of the jackpot reliability. For example, the outline of the "red" character in the first preview may be different from the outline of the "red" character in the second preview. In this case, it is also desirable to set different reliability and appearance rates for the first preview and the second preview, so that even if the colors suggest the same reliability (for example, red), the outline of the text can be expressed in accordance with the reliability or appearance rate of the preview itself. This makes it possible to make the player aware that different reliability and appearance rates have been set for each preview, even if the base colors appear to suggest the same reliability.

In the case of effects that involve audio output such as dialogue, preview effects that involve lip-syncing (speaking actions) using character images, etc., and preview effects that do not, may be provided, and the reliability of each may be configured to differ. For example, preview effects that involve lip-syncing may be configured to have a higher reliability than preview effects that do not involve lip-syncing. Also, preview effects that involve lip-syncing may be configured to include more highly reliable reliability suggestive patterns than preview effects that do not involve lip-syncing. Also, preview effects that involve lip-syncing may be configured to more easily produce highly reliable reliability suggestive patterns than preview effects that do not involve lip-syncing. In this way, when a preview effect that involves lip-syncing occurs, the player can expect that a more reliable reliability suggestive pattern will occur. Also, preview effects that involve lip-syncing may be configured to have a longer preview execution time than preview effects that do not involve lip-syncing. This allows for a more ample duration for preview performances that involve lip-syncing, allowing for longer lines to be set, while preview performances that do not involve lip-syncing can be set shorter to prevent the overall duration of the performance from becoming too long, allowing for the overall balance of the execution time of performances that involve dialogue to be adjusted.

The system may be configured to display a reserved pedestal image or reserved image during an operation performance performed before a specified reach (e.g., SP reach) performance, and not display the reserved pedestal image or reserved image during an operation performance performed during a specified reach (SP reach) performance (or during the specified reach performance). In this case, the system may be configured to display a high-brightness image of a display size that does not overlap the reserved pedestal image or reserved image in front of it during an operation performance performed before a specified reach (SP reach) performance, and to display a larger high-brightness image using the area where the reserved pedestal image or reserved image was displayed before the specified reach (SP reach) performance, since the reserved pedestal image or reserved image is not displayed during an operation performance. Furthermore, regardless of the operation performance, the display size of the high-brightness image may be configured to differ before and after the specified reach (SP reach) performance, as described above. Furthermore, the display size of the high-brightness image may be configured to differ between when a reserved base image or reserved image (or other images with a higher display priority than the high-brightness image, such as a customized image, a variable count display image, or a mini-character image, which have a higher display priority than the high-brightness image) is displayed and when it is not displayed, without being limited to the distinction between before and after the predetermined reach (SP reach) performance. That is, the display size of the high-brightness image may be configured to differ between when there is an object with a higher display priority than the high-brightness image and when there is no object with a higher display priority than the high-brightness image. Furthermore, when there is an object with a higher display priority than the high-brightness image, the high-brightness image may be displayed at a display size that does not overlap with those objects (does not overlap behind those objects), or may be displayed at a display size that overlaps with those objects (overlaps behind those objects). In the former case, the display size of the high-brightness image can be reduced, allowing for further compression and reduction of image data; in the latter case, the display size of the high-brightness image can be increased to create a more impactful display.

In effects in which dialogue sounds, etc. are output before the start of a high-brightness effect (for example, the reach development effects shown in Figures 55 to 58), the dialogue sounds may be configured to end output before the high-brightness effect begins. Alternatively, the high-brightness effect may be started while dialogue sounds are being output, and the dialogue sounds output may end while the high-brightness effect is being executed. Alternatively, the dialogue sounds may be configured to start outputting after the high-brightness effect has started. However, in either case, it is desirable to end the dialogue sounds output at least before the high-brightness effect ends.

When executing a dialogue effect after the start of a high-brightness effect, the dialogue sound may be configured to begin outputting while the high-brightness effect is being executed (before the transparency reaches 100%), or the dialogue sound may be configured to begin outputting after the high-brightness effect has ended (after the transparency reaches 100%). Furthermore, when dialogue sound output begins while the high-brightness effect is being executed (before the transparency reaches 100%), it is desirable to configure the dialogue sound not to involve lip-syncing of the character image (lip-syncing in time with the dialogue). This is because, even if lip-syncing is executed in a state where the visibility of the character image displayed behind it is reduced due to the high-brightness effect, the player may not be able to recognize it. Therefore, it is desirable to execute dialogue effects that involve lip-syncing of the character image in a manner that does not involve the execution of a high-brightness effect. Furthermore, dialogue effects that involve lip-syncing of the character image are preferably used in scenes that do not involve the execution of a high-brightness effect. In this way, by considering the relationship between dialogue effects and high-brightness effects and selectively using or not using lip-syncing for character images, it is possible to reduce the amount of effect data and achieve effective effect expression using the right tools in the right places.

However, this is not a limitation, and the character image's lip-syncing motion may also be configured to be executed during dialogue effects accompanied by high-brightness effects. In such cases, it is desirable to start the dialogue effects and lip-syncing motion of the character image after the high-brightness effects have ended. Furthermore, when starting dialogue effects and lip-syncing motion of the character image during execution of a high-brightness effect, it is desirable to execute the high-brightness effect in at least an area that does not overlap the character image. Furthermore, when executing a high-brightness effect in an area that overlaps the character image, it is desirable to execute the dialogue effects and lip-syncing motion of the character image from the moment the transmittance of the high-brightness effect at least in front of the character image reaches 100% or nearly 100%, thereby enabling the dialogue effects to be executed without reducing the visibility of the character image and/or the character image's lip-syncing motion. Furthermore, when starting the display of dialogue text during execution of a high-brightness effect and outputting the accompanying dialogue sounds, it is desirable to start outputting the dialogue sounds from the moment at which at least a portion of the text becomes visible. This means that even if the player cannot understand the content of the dialogue, they can at least recognize that the dialogue sound has begun to be output in response to the text, and can enjoy the subsequent reveal of the text as the transmittance of the high-brightness effects changes, while building up a sense of anticipation for the dialogue effects.

Furthermore, when the display of a dialogue effect begins while a high-brightness effect is being executed and the accompanying dialogue sound is output, if at least a portion of the string is visible, it is desirable to make the color of the string based on its reliability recognizable. This allows the player to enjoy the subsequent reveal of the string as the transmittance of the high-brightness effect changes, while understanding the reliability of the dialogue effect. On the other hand, when the display of a dialogue effect begins while a high-brightness effect is being executed and the accompanying dialogue sound is output, if at least a portion of the string is visible, the color of the string based on its reliability may be made unrecognizable or difficult to recognize. This allows the player to experience joy or despair depending on the subsequent reveal of the string as the transmittance of the high-brightness effect changes, since they cannot understand the reliability of the dialogue effect.

Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to pachinko machines, and can be similarly implemented in other gaming machines such as slot machines, arrange ball machines, and mahjong ball gaming machines.

As in the examples described so far, by varying the presentation style of the high-brightness effects depending on the preview, it is possible to prevent the presentation of the high-brightness effects from becoming monotonous, thereby enhancing the presentation effect. Furthermore, by not simply varying the content of the high-brightness effects, but also considering the execution of high-brightness effects depending on the content and type of preview, it is possible to achieve more appropriate presentation.

17 Launching means 23 Play area 56 Second start winning means 76 Left flow down area (first flow down area)
77 Right downstream area (second downstream area)
93 First special symbol display means (first symbol display means)
94 Second special symbol display means (second symbol display means)
111 First start winning port (first start winning means)
323 Special random number storage means (first and second reserved storage means)
326 Special profit state generating means (profit state generating means)
327 Special game state generating means 333 Reserved special notification means

Claims (1)

a first symbol display means capable of variably displaying a first symbol based on first random number information acquired when a gaming ball enters a non-operating first start winning means;
a first reserved storage means for reserving and storing the first random number information up to an upper reserved number limit until the first random number information is used for a pattern change by the first pattern display means;
A second start-up winning means that changes from a closed state in which the game ball cannot or has difficulty entering the ball to an open state in which the game ball can enter more easily when a predetermined opening condition is met;
a second symbol display means for variably displaying a second symbol based on second random number information acquired when a gaming ball enters the second starting winning means;
a profit state generating means for generating a profit state when the stopped symbols after the variation of the first symbol display means become a first specific pattern based on a lottery result using the first random number information, or when the stopped symbols after the variation of the second symbol display means become a second specific pattern based on a lottery result using the second random number information;
a special game state generating means for generating a special game state with a predetermined probability after the end of the profit state;
and a movable performance means,
During the special game state, the time during which the second start winning means is in the open state is longer than during other normal game states,
The game ball shot into the upper side of the game area by the launching means flows down through either a first flow-down area on one side of the game area or a second flow-down area on the other side of the game area,
A gaming ball flowing down the first flow-down area is more likely to enter the first start winning means than a gaming ball flowing down the second flow-down area,
In a gaming machine configured such that a gaming ball flowing down the second flow area is more likely to enter the second start winning means than a gaming ball flowing down the first flow area,
a special reserved notification means for notifying that the first reserved number, which is the number of the first random number information reserved and stored in the first reserved storage means, has reached a predetermined number or more;
The predetermined number is less than the upper limit reservation number,
During the profit state and the special game state, the notification by the reserved special notification means is not executed,
The pattern change effect that can be executed in response to the change display of the first pattern and suggests the occurrence of the profit state includes a specific pattern change effect accompanied by the operation of the movable effect means,
When the specific symbol variation effect is not executed, the notification by vibration by the reserved special notification means can be executed,
When the specific symbol variation effect is executed, the reserved special notification means does not issue a notification by vibration.